JP7197938B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

A conventional gaming machine comprises main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. is common.

Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with movable effect means that can be operated in a predetermined manner (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-187648 A

However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, no consideration is given to the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that allows smooth cooperation between main control means and effect control means.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the present invention, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and effects corresponding to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a game machine provided with controllable effect control means (effect control board 130), the effect means (effect button) capable of vibrating in a predetermined manner is provided, and the main control means is supplied with power. Based on this, it is possible to transmit a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), and the effect control means executes a predetermined initial vibration of the effect means after the start of power supply. It is possible to execute a variable performance with a plurality of performance symbols for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player on the display means (image display device). a customer waiting effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) can be executed by the display means in a standby state, and the main control means during display of a standby screen in which the plurality of effect symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination; While the power supply to is stopped, when the power supply to the effect control means continues, it is possible to continue the display of the standby screen in which the plurality of effect symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination, When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received during execution of the customer waiting effect after the end of the predetermined initial vibration of the effect means after the start of power supply, It is characterized in that it is possible to execute the predetermined initial vibration of the effect means.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting production|presentation processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system production|presentation process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for pending icons; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1 step change pattern determination table for the said icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-stage change pattern determination table for the said icon. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the icon change pattern determination table for power failure. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the occurrence frequency of the pending icon display mode and the change effect generation timing, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect generation timing. (c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 between the occurrence frequency of the change effect type and the change effect generation timing, and (d) is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed). FIG. 10 shows. It is a figure which shows the continuous announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an advance notice scenario determination table; It is a figure which shows the continuation notice production|presentation execution process in an production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an alternative notice pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the lamp change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the jackpot announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit advance notice determination table. It is a figure which shows the main process in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the command reception interrupt processing in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the V blank interrupt processing in an integrated control part. It is a timing chart 1 of the change effect at the time of winning. Fig. 2 is a timing chart 2 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the change production|presentation at the time of winning. 1 is a timing chart 1 of a normal change pattern 01; FIG. 2 is a timing chart 2 of normal change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of normal change pattern 01; 1 is a timing chart 1 of a character effect change pattern 01; FIG. 2 is a timing chart 2 of character effect change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the character action change pattern 01; FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 42; It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 of the pattern action change pattern 01. FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 of the pattern action change pattern 01. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the pattern action change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 46; It is a timing chart when a variable effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 49; It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variable production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the variable effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation which increases immediately after the number of reservations decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during specific reach production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the specific reach effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 58; It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp/driving control part. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing origin return processing in a lamp/drive control unit; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing initial operation processing in a lamp/drive control unit; It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of resuming power supply only to the main control board after stopping; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; It is a figure which shows the modification when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the icon change effect and the lamp change effect are restarted after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 84; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous notice effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 86; It is a figure which shows a specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp/driving control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then restarted. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a game machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. It is Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It is possible to perform maintenance of

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. there is Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are a sound output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game ball put out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. An upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have flowed into an overflow ball flow path described later without being able to enter the upper plate 11, and game balls. A firing operation device 13 that can be operated for firing is provided.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 with an interval therebetween, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sounds (music, voice). It has become. A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a which is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality (to be described later) occurs.

The upper plate 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a which is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the shooting operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various productions described later. They are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) for detecting an operation to the production button 17, and a production button. A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 2) is provided for driving the game machine 17 so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The effect button 17 can perform effect light emission by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. Vertical movement between a standby position (original position) positioned below and a production position positioned above by the driving force of a button drive motor, which is a part of the device 17b, and/or the button drive device 17b It is possible to perform a production action by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode by the driving force of the button vibration motor that is a part of the button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position. be.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can be operated such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a ( 2) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

In addition, a lending/returning operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in the game machine 1 is subtracted to lend the game balls. is performed, and when a return button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path. is detected, the game ball payout by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 2), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 2) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emission for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A device 15c is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes the front portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. It is By emitting light from this LED, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect in which the firing handle 15 emits light in a predetermined manner.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25 , and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 are connected to the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.

The shooting device 26 includes a hitting member 28 for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the hitting member 28, and an upward movement from the hitting member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. An inclined shooting rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at the shooting position which is the inclined lower end of the shooting rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member 28. - 特許庁

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 positioned outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of game balls into the inside, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decoration frame 40. - 特許庁A warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce game balls flowing down the game area 5 a into the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling a game ball introduced into the interior of the frame 40 and causing it to flow downward.

In the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 43 in which a game ball can always win a prize (entering a ball) are provided at intervals. 43 is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown). It is put out to the upper tray 11 as a ball.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a general pattern gate 44 (normal pattern start area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball that has passed through this general pattern gate 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 2), a winning lottery (assisting game determination) of normal symbols is performed. It should be noted that the winning lottery of normal symbols will be described later.

At the bottom of the game area 5a and directly under the stage portion 42, there is provided a first start port 45 (special figure start region) in which the game ball can always win a prize (enter a ball), and this first start port 45 When a winning (entering) game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are discharged from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. It is to be paid out on 11th. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) for a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, a game ball is opened from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a winning lottery with a normal symbol is won). A variable starting portion 46 is provided which is converted to an open state (special mode) that allows or facilitates winning (entering a ball).

The variable starting unit 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting region) in which a game ball can win (entering a ball), and a second A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2), a movable member 48 that changes (variable) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid for opening and closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 2) are provided. And, when the second starting port 47 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is open, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easier.

In addition, when the game ball that has entered the second start hole 47 is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. It is designed to be dispensed onto the upper tray 11 . In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) to be described later is performed.

Between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46, there is provided a prize winning port lamp NR (not shown) for causing the periphery of the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform lighting effects by emitting light from a board lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the right-hand normal pattern gate 44, a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize (enter a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a special symbol jackpot lottery) A variable winning portion 49 is provided which is converted from (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can win (enter a ball).

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can win (enter a ball), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (FIG. 2), an opening/closing member 51 that converts (variable) the large winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 51 are provided. When the large winning opening 50 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the winning of the game ball (ball ) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are released from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. 11 will be paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A game ball detected by the second starting hole detection switch 47a and the big winning hole detection switch 50a, and a game ball that has flowed into the out hole 39 are received and gathered while flowing down. An out ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream portion of the ball flow path. A game ball flowing down this out ball flow path and detected by the out ball detection switch 52a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island facility) from a discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1. - 特許庁

Outside the game area 5a, there are a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63, a second special symbol reservation display device 64, as well as. Ordinary pattern holding display 65, round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) to be described later is executed, and jackpot game (special game) or time saving game state Inside, a right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 2) prompting the shooting of the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a, and a state confirmation display indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. A main information display 59 is provided comprising a device 68 (see FIG. 2).

Also, a winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). The probability of winning a jackpot (1/285 to 1/300) and set values (4 to 1) of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are printed on the winning probability display sticker. It should be noted that the sticking position of the winning probability display sticker 200 is just an example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. FIG.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery with the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is used to display (notify) the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is a variable display device, and the normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot lottery with the first special symbol is obtained by acquiring a random number for judging a big hit (judgment information) when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the obtained random number for judging a big hit and the jackpot. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing with the determination value. When the first special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 60 displays the first special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. will be That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

The second special symbol jackpot lottery is obtained by acquiring a jackpot judgment random number value (judgment information) when a game ball enters the second start port 47, and acquiring the jackpot judgment random number value and the jackpot. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing with the determination value. It should be noted that when the second special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the second special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. will be That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big win mode, losing mode) indicating the result of each big win lottery.

It should be noted that the "jackpot" in the present embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot lottery (special game determination), or the second special symbol jackpot lottery (special game determination), the jackpot game (special game) It refers to the state in which the right to execute has been acquired. The "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning port 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9) wins (enters a ball), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous to the player who can easily win prize balls. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to generate any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games with different degrees of advantage for the player, which will be described later in detail.

The winning lottery of the normal pattern is obtained by acquiring a random number value for hitting judgment when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, and comparing the obtained random number value for judgment with the hit judgment value to see if it is a "win". It corresponds to determining whether or not When the winning lottery for the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 62, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate the result of the lottery. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

Incidentally, the normal symbol display device 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is obtained in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 even before reaching the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) win a prize (entering a ball), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. In other words, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition of the variable display is likely to be established). In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

The first special symbol holding display device 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is a jackpot lottery of the first special symbol that is stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45 (first special symbol It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Although the maximum number of first reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display device 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the second special symbol jackpot lottery (the second special symbol) is stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved memory) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reserved memories. Although the maximum number of second reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display device 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the right for performing a normal symbol winning lottery (normal symbol fluctuation display) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes) the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (normal pattern reserved memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of normal pattern reserved memory. In addition, although the general pattern reservation memory is designed to be stored up to four at maximum, it may be less than or more than four.

Note that the first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, when a jackpot lottery with a special pattern is won, "7" is stopped and displayed, and when it is lost, "-" is stopped and displayed. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the variable display of special symbols, the result of stopping the previous variable display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the variable display starts, the LED is turned off. It becomes easy to grasp that it has been started.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. is started, the lighting of the LED is continued during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left lights up, and if the jackpot game has 16 rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state, the right-handed player urges to shoot the game ball toward the right gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting). It is for displaying a beating display, and the LED lights up during a big win state (special game state) and a time saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. , the LED starts lighting, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the state confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (surface) of the gaming machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily check whether it is set to

It should be noted that the installation position of the state confirmation display 68 is an example, and is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1 .

In the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. You can For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be flashed. When the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 and any one of the second game information display devices 69 are illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status Only the confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are turned off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

In the lower right part inside the game area 5a, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 , a sub-normal figure holding display 86, and a sub-right-handed display 87 that prompts to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed). The sub-information display device 80 is not provided with an indicator such as the status confirmation indicator 68 described above, which indicates that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set.

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery with the first special symbol, and the second sub-variation display 82 displays the result of the jackpot lottery with the second special symbol. They are for (notifying), and are each composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special pattern is started, the LED flashes (variable display) at a predetermined interval, and when the corresponding special pattern is stopped and displayed, the result of the jackpot lottery (lights up in the case of a big hit, loses) in the case of ) is displayed as stopped.

In addition, in the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82, it blinks and stops while the special symbols are being varied, so that only whether or not the special symbols are being varied is displayed. It may be turned on or off when displayed.

The first sub-reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories, and the second sub-reservation display 84 is for displaying the number of second reservation memories. It consists of two LEDs. When the number of reserved memories is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reserved memories is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, and the number of reserved memories is "2". When , the left and right LEDs light up, when the number of reserved memories is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reserved memories is "4", the left and right LEDs blink. .

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning, light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed fluctuating can be grasped, it blinks during the normal pattern fluctuation display, and when it is stopped, it lights up or turns off. may

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation storages, and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. Then, when the number of normal pattern reservation memory is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of normal pattern reservation memory is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, and the normal pattern reservation When the memory number is "2", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the normal figure reservation memory number is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made up of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the production space 40a, and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in the lower part of the production space 40a. , a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided. is provided, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the production space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) performs various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting demo effect executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the effect pattern executed during the variable display of the special symbol There is a variable production with a variable display of 70a.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas such as a left area, a central area, and a right area. The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed by scrolling the production pattern 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment).

In addition, the effect pattern 70a is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the variable display of special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61 is performed. The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed corresponding to (synchronization with). That is, the variable display of the production design 70a is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special design, the performance design 70a is temporarily stopped (swing display) before the stop of the variable display of the special design, and the special design is changed. In response to the stop display of the display, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is stopped (still displayed). Incidentally, as the production pattern 70a, in addition to the patterns showing numbers, patterns showing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided.

Note that the "temporary stop display" means that the performance symbol 70a shakes slightly or deforms slightly to give the player the impression that the performance symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a stops for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (losing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same production pattern such as "777" or a combination of production patterns with regularity such as "357", and the losing mode is other aspects. be. In addition, the form of the variable display of the production pattern 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be rotated (rotated) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the production pattern 70a, various production images such as a reach production, a background image, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second display according to the result of the big winning lottery. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectation for the execution of the big win (special game) (hereinafter referred to as "big win expectation") is heightened. there is

Here, the "ready-to-win effect" means that a jackpot game is executed for the player such that a part of the combinations of the effect patterns 70a that inform the big win are temporarily stopped and the other effect patterns 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that makes you expect that. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a (jackpot result mode) for notifying a big hit, two performance symbols 70a are set in the left and right regions. 7" is temporarily stopped, and the remaining production pattern 70a is changing in the central area.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are five types of ready-to-win effects, ie, "normal ready-to-win effects", "SP ready-to-win effects", "SPSP ready-to-win effects", and "full-rotation ready-to-win effects".

"Normal reach effect" is a state in which the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect pattern 70a is displayed in the central area. It is a ready-to-win production that is executed in a state in which a variable ready-to-win state is formed.

"SP ready-to-win production" is executed after the normal ready-to-win production, and the production pattern 70a in the state of forming the ready-to-win state is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the production effect is higher than the normal ready-to-win production (high expectation of winning big) ) It is a reach effect in which a movie (video, animation, etc.) flows.

“SPSP reach production” is executed after normal reach production or SP reach production, and a movie (movie, animation, etc.) with a higher production effect (higher expectations for a big hit) than normal reach production or SP reach production. It's about performance.

The “all-rotation ready-to-win effect” is a ready-to-win effect that fluctuates at a low speed in a state in which all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for reporting a big win are complete. In the present embodiment, it is a ready-to-win effect that is executed only when winning in the jackpot lottery.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot related to the ready-to-win effect is higher in the order of normal ready-to-win effect<SP ready-to-win effect<SPSP ready-to-win effect<all-rotation ready-to-win effect (jackpot confirmed).

In addition, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserved (U1), which is the number of the current first reserved memory, is displayed. 1st pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second pending icons corresponding to the second special symbol pending number (U2) which is the number of the current second pending storage Then, the icon display area 70C is formed for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed.

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The display portions 70B1 to 70B4 display the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1). That is, the number of first reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the first special symbol reserved number (U1).

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 displays the first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70B2 displays 2 The first reserved icon H12 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is displayed in the third display section 70B3, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the third display. A first reserved icon H13 indicating the first reserved memory is displayed, and a first reserved icon H14 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display portion 70B4. be done.

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The second reserved icons corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) are displayed on the display portions 70D1 to 70D4. That is, the number of second reserved icons is increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the second special symbol reserved number (U2).

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays the second pending icon H21 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays two The second holding icon H22 indicating the second holding memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third in the third display section 70D3. A second suspended icon H23 indicating a second suspended memory is displayed, and a second suspended icon H24 indicating a second suspended memory in which the fourth display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display portion 70D4. be done. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "first special symbol reserved number" may be referred to as "first reserved number" and the "second special symbol reserved number" may be referred to as "second reserved number".

The icon display area 70C displays the first pending icon or the second When the second pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TH is displayed, and when the variable display of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a) ends. The icon TH disappears (deletes). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first reserved icon", the "second reserved icon", and the "relevant icon" may be collectively referred to as "icons".

The first movable member 73 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. It is vertically moved between a standby position (origin position) located above and a production position located below by the driving force of the first movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform a performance action by moving to , and the fact that it is at the origin position is detected by a first position detection sensor (not shown).

The second movable member 74 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. By the driving force of the second movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 2), the position between the standby position (origin position) located on the upper right and the production position located on the lower left It is possible to perform a performance action by moving diagonally up and down, and a second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the rendering positions of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate simultaneously. By not doing so, they do not conflict with each other.

In addition, if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, after one movable member moves to the rendering position, it returns to a position that does not overlap with the rendering position of the other movable member. The other movable member may be moved to the performance position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a game ball payout device 100 for putting out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), island facilities, etc. A main control device 110A (not shown) containing a game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores game balls to be supplied and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, and a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game. , a payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 for controlling the game ball payout device 100 according to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and an effect control command from the main control board 110 A production control device 130A (not shown) incorporating a production control board 130 for controlling production accordingly, and a power supply device 160A (not shown) incorporating a power supply board 160 for supplying power supply voltage to various control devices, A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 2) is provided for outputting game information (game signal) to the outside of the gaming machine.

The main control unit 110A includes a main control board 110 on which various electronic components are mounted, a transparent resin board case for housing the main control board 110, and a board case regulating the opening of the board case. A sealing seal 104 and a transparent resin seal cover member 105 attached to the substrate case so as to cover the sealing seal 104 are provided.

On the surface side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a stage of clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or the degree of advantage of the game (game RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value, and a signal for shifting to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting key. A setting key switch 112a for inputting , an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values, etc., which enables the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values to be described later), and four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) having a decimal point DP are arranged side by side. It consists of An identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured on two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of setting values and performance information is configured by .

The substrate case includes a concave lower case member whose portion facing the back side of the main control board 110 is open, and a concave upper case member whose portion facing the front side of the main control board 110 is open. A housing space for housing the main control board 110 is formed by closing the lower case member and the upper case member.

On the upper surface of the upper case member, a model name sticker printed with the model name (model name) of the gaming machine 1 so as not to overlap the information display 113 and a management number printed with the control number of the main control board 110 are printed. Number stickers are attached in a row on the left and right. At a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a, an operation member 108 for pressing (ON) the actuator of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted. When the operation member 108 is pressed, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on.

An insertion portion (not shown) for inserting the setting key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a is formed at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a. The insertion portion has an opening for exposing the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to the outside, and a cylindrical portion extending rearward from the opening edge of the opening so as to cover the periphery of the setting key switch 112a. doing. When the setting key is inserted into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a through the opening and turned to the right from the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned on so that the setting key cannot be removed from the keyhole. When the setting key switch 112a is returned to the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned off so that the setting key can be removed from the keyhole.

The management number sticker has an opener entry part for writing the name of the person opening the main control board 110 and an opening date entry part for writing the opening date of the main control board 110 on the surface of a colorless and transparent base seal. They are arranged side by side on the left and right.

The opener entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction. A transparent window region is provided for visual confirmation (visual confirmation) of mounted electronic components.

The opening date entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and is mounted on the surface of the main control board 110 between the entry areas. A transparent window area is provided for viewing (visual confirmation) of the mounted electronic components.

The first to fourth entry areas of the opening person entry section are adjacent to the first to fourth entry areas of the opening date entry section with a space therebetween, and the surface of the main control board 110 is located between the entry areas. A transparent window region is provided for viewing (visually confirming) the electronic components mounted on the device.

As the information display device 113, a performance display unit formed by unitizing a circuit section composed of four 7-segment displays and substrates may be mounted on the main control substrate. Even in that case, it is desirable to displace them so that they do not overlap in the front and back so that the model name sticker and control number sticker do not restrict (shield) the visibility.

Also, instead of mounting the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 on the main control board 110, at least one of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 is mounted on a dedicated board. It may be mounted and connected to the main control board 110 board-to-board so as to be included in the board case of the main control board 110 .

In addition, the RWM clear switch 111a is not mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, but is provided on the power board 160 if it is in a position where the player cannot operate it. It may be provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 or on the back side of the glass frame 4 . Even in this case, it is preferable to input the signal from the RWM clear switch 111a to the main controller 110m.

In addition, instead of inputting a signal for clearing the stored content of the main RAM 110c or updating the setting value by operating the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting value is updated separately from the RWM clear switch 111a. A dedicated setting switch for inputting the signal may be provided. In this case, the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch may be mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, or the power supply board may be located at a position where the player cannot operate. 160 , on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 , or on the back side of the glass frame 4 .

In addition, instead of displaying both the performance information and the setting values on the information display 113, another display is displayed on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110. The performance information may be displayed on one of the displays, and the setting values may be displayed on the other display.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic actions). The main control board 110 is a one-chip microcomputer equipped with a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program, etc., and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing (corresponding to volatile storage means). It has a main control unit 110m as a main control, an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling the controlled devices (such as various solenoids and various displays). device), or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to allow bidirectional command (data) communication, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. Commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130 .

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing corresponding to the detection signals is performed.

The output ports of the main control board 110 include the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the main information display device 59, and the game information output. A terminal board 90, a payout control board 120, an effect control board 130, and the like are connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, and game information output terminal board to notify the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the output port Information and the like are output.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory area of the main ROM 110b includes a game ROM area in which programs and data relating to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data relating to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored. An unused area of 16 bytes or more in which "0" is stored together with the above, a ROM comment area in which data such as the program title and version are stored, and a vector table in which the start address of the timer interrupt process described later is set. An area and an HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibited area are set are arranged in this order.

The game ROM area includes a game program area in which a program relating to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data relating to the progress of the game. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area to which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the game machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the game machine. are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing the game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when the information program is executed are arranged in order. there is

The game RWM area consists of a game work area used as a work by the game program, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the game program is temporarily stored. A game stack area to be temporarily saved and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The game work area includes a set value area for storing set values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (a checksum to be described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and a judgment information area that changes according to the progress of the game. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area consists of an information work area used by the information program as a work area, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the information program is temporarily saved. Information stack areas are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information relating to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information relating to various error determinations are arranged in this order.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on a game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on an information program will be described. Describe relationships.

When the main CPU 110a performs a process based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area and, while using the game RWM area as a work, refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area. ing. Also, when performing processing based on an information program, basically the data area for information is referenced, and the contents of the RWM area for information are referenced and updated while using the RWM area for information as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

When performing processing based on the information program, after the flag register is saved in the game RWM area in the processing based on the game program, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program. The flag register is returned from the game RWM area immediately after the process based on the program is completed and the game program is returned to.

Immediately after the information program is started, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set. immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, the data used by the game program can be protected when processing based on the information program is performed, and inconvenience will occur when returning from the information program to the game program. will disappear.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on the reception of payout commands from the main control board 110 and controls the shooting of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 for driving the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 for driving the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing relating to the payout of game balls, thereby providing a game ball payout device. 100, or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Input ports of the payout control unit 121 include an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit. , and the output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 .

When receiving a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to control a predetermined number of game balls to be put out. When it is detected that a predetermined number of game balls have been put out, control for putting out game balls is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like, which are not shown. The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b. ing.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the energization of the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the shooting solenoid 28b. When the change in rotation angle of the shooting handle 15 is detected by the detection signal from the shooting volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is shot so that the shooting intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the shooting handle 15. A solenoid 28b is driven to shoot a game ball.

The shooting solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the hitting member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. . The operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the game ball is fired in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a subordinate control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect (performed in the gaming machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110 . The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., display/sound control unit 140, frame lighting device 10, handle light emitting device 15c, button driving device 17b, and board A lamp/driving control unit 150 for controlling the lighting device 76, the board driving device 75, etc., and an input port and an output port for effect control are provided.

The sub CPU 130a reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b upon receiving an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to effects while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. In response to an input signal from the effect button detection switch 17a or the cross key detection switch 19a, various control units (display/sound control unit 140, lamp/driving control unit 150) are controlled to execute various effects ( output data or commands).

The input port of the effect control board 130 is connected with the effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like. In the performance control board 130, a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 is operated is input from the performance button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 is operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

The display/sound control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. or control the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

The display/sound control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 having an overall CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 144 that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, and a VDP (image processor). a CGROM 146 storing image data and the like; and a frame buffer and the like provided inside the image control unit 145 for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. a VRAM 147, an audio controller 148 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored, an input/output port and the like.

The supervising CPU 142 reads out the display control program stored in the supervising ROM 143 in response to the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while using the supervising RAM 144 as a work area. In response to an effect instruction command or the like, the image control unit 145 and the sound control unit 148 are controlled to execute various effects (output data and commands).

The overall ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM and the like, and includes a display control program for displaying images, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of a drawing control command group, and an animation of a production pattern. An animation pattern for the purpose, animation scene information, etc. are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the image presentation, and is associated with animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters for drawing (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing method , the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 in which various image data are stored. Based on the image data, drawing data that is the source of a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, a performance design image, a background image constituting the background of the performance design. , character images, and dialogue images. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (eg, 32×32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read in units of image data by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

The CGROM 146 also stores palette data in which color number information specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated without being compressed. Note that the CGROM 146 may be configured to compress only a portion of the image data without compressing all of the image data. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM with which image data can be written or read at high speed. The VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub It has a frame buffer area etc. corresponding to liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) transfers the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 to the “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142). , the drawing data is read from the "frame buffer for display" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), Then, it outputs to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display various images.

An operation clock is supplied from a crystal oscillator to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and by dividing this operation clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronizing signal (horizontal synchronizing signal/vertical synchronizing signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are generated. output to In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be 60 fps (1/60 second=approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

General-purpose controllers for converting image data into a predetermined image format and outputting them are provided between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). A substrate 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function to convert image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) for displaying image data. For example, the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device with XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) is connected. Absorb.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on various production data (including commands) transmitted from the production control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp/drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp/drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp/driving control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the production. Controls (outputs data and commands) are performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined effects in accordance with the received effect instruction commands and the like.

The frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 are connected to the input/output ports of the lamp/driving control section. 130m (sub CPU 130a) based on the various performance data (including commands) transmitted, lighting of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the board lighting device 76, and the sub information display device 80 It also controls driving of drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the button driving device 17b and the board driving device 75 .

The power board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, It is supplied to the production control board 130 and various electronic parts). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure); A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when power is cut off (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from power failure (power failure), the control state of the game is restored to the state before power failure (power failure). can be restored. A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 .

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, it has a "low probability gaming state" and a "high probability gaming state" as the state related to the special symbol jackpot lottery, and the state related to the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 "non-time-saving game state” and “time-saving game state”.

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A low-probability non-short-time gaming state that is a “low-probability gaming state” and a “non-short-time gaming state” (2) A low-probability short-time gaming state that is a “low-probability gaming state” and a “short-time gaming state” (3) “ High probability game state "and" time saving game state "high probability time saving game state"

In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability short-time game state", and this game state is referred to as the "normal game state ” will be called. In addition, in the present embodiment, "low-probability short-time gaming state" and "high-probability short-time gaming state" may be referred to as "specific game state" because it is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. .

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" means, for example, when the set value (jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is "1", the first start port 45, or , a game state in which the probability of winning a big win is set as low as about 1/300 in a special pattern big win lottery performed on the condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 47.例文帳に追加On the other hand, in the "high-probability gaming state", the probability of winning the jackpot is improved compared to the low-probability gaming state. It says the game state that has been set.

Concretely, there are 4 kinds of setting values from "1" to "4." The probability of winning the jackpot in the probability game state is about 1/60, and when the set value is "2", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability game state is about 1/295, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability game state is about 1/295. The probability of winning is about 1/59, and when the set value is "3", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability game state is about 1/290, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability game state is about 1/58. When the set value is "4", the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state is about 1/285, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability game state is about 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". In addition, the change from the low probability game state to the high probability game state is after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as "probability variable jackpot". Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called a "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, "non-time-saving gaming state" means that in the normal pattern hit lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average variation of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result It refers to a game state in which the time is set longer than the "time-saving game state" and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is likely to be set short. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the normal pattern display device 62. For example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the normal symbols.

On the other hand, the "time-saving game state" means that in the normal pattern winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result A game state that is set shorter than the "non-time-saving game state" and is set longer than the "non-time-saving game state", for example, 2.5 seconds for the opening time of the second start port 47 when the winning is won. say. Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example, 127. /128 is set high. Therefore, in the "time-saving gaming state", when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". As a result, in the "time-saving gaming state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time-saving gaming state" is more advantageous than the "non-time-saving gaming state" in terms of the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. is set to However, the "time-saving gaming state" may be set so that only one of the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. . In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning a winning lottery of normal symbols may be set to 0/128, for example.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is five times the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability gaming state (common regardless of the set value). The probability of being determined as is not limited to 5 times, and may be set to an arbitrary value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as the value is 10 times or less.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot lottery, a small win that is less advantageous to the advantageous person than the big win is not won. may In this case, it is preferable to set the small winning probability to be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

Also, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous it is to the player (the higher the probability of a big hit). can be

In addition, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the low probability gaming state and / or the high probability gaming state may be the same for all setting values (1 to 4), for example, two or three setting values ( 1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the low probability game state and/or the high probability game state may be the same.

Also, the set values in this embodiment are in four stages from 1 to 4, but are not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages.

(Types of jackpot games)
Next, the types of jackpot games will be described.

In the present embodiment, as the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, "first jackpot game", "second jackpot game", and "second jackpot game" 3 jackpot games", and "first jackpot game" and "second jackpot game" are provided as types of jackpot games that can be won in a jackpot lottery based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 47. doing.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 10 times, in which the big winning hole 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses.

After the end of the first jackpot game, the high-accuracy short-time game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially decided.

"Second jackpot game" means that the round game is executed up to 10 times. After the end of the second jackpot game, the low-probability short working hours game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

"Third jackpot" means that the round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third jackpot game, the high-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially decided.

In addition, the number of times of fluctuation display (in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned 100 times or 10000 times) of the specific game state (high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) set after the jackpot game is referred to as "high probability It may be expressed as "number of times" or "time reduction number of times".

In this embodiment, the number of types of jackpot games is three, but the number is not limited to three, and may be less or more than three. In addition, the opening time of the opening and closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds in any jackpot game (first jackpot game to third jackpot game), but the opening time may not be 29.5 seconds, It is good also as opening time which changes with round games.

(Type of winning game)
Next, the types of hits will be explained.

In this embodiment, as the type of winning game that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the normal figure gate 44, "first winning game" and "second winning game", If the winning lottery is executed in a non-time-saving game state, it becomes a "first winning game", and if the winning lottery is executed in a time-saving game state, it becomes a "second winning game".

The "first winning game" is to open the second starting port 47 up to 0.2 seconds. That is, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

"Second winning game" means that the second starting port 47 is opened until 2.6 seconds, then closed until 1.5 seconds, and then opened again until 2.6 seconds. That is, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In the first winning game and the second winning game, the winning game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enters the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses.

Thus, in the "time-saving gaming state", it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47, and the player can enjoy the game without consuming the game ball than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". It is possible to proceed.

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S1, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and waits for activation of other boards in step S3. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S7 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step S8 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S9 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs setting change processing in step S9. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and the setting value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. display the current setting values saved in , and transmit a setting change designation command to the performance control board 130. - 特許庁

Further, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the setting value is changed (updated) within the range of "1" to "4", and the updated setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is turned off. When there is a setting confirmation operation to change from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting value after change (update) is saved in the setting value area as confirmation of the setting value, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is terminated. At the same time, the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is terminated, and processing for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

Incidentally, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command, processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed is performed. Specifically, a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are displayed in a predetermined manner during the setting change. All of the LEDs are lit in a luminescent color (for example, white). Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (the data in the game RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the game RWM area is abnormal), Assuming that the control state before the power-off cannot be normally restored, the process proceeds to step S12.

If the backup flag is not saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S12. Transfer.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130 , set interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. and wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing non-restorable error notification is performed.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Although the "unrecoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, it may also be canceled when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

The "unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred. ) is displayed, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 76 for the board are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the voice output device 9. An unrecoverable error sound ("This is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.
Note that the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the board lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as a "drawing device."

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S14 assuming that the RWM clear is to be executed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S14. Specifically, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability short-time game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process proceeds to step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized. ), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the RWM area is displayed from the audio output device 9. A power-on notification sound (“RWM cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating initialization is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S17 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and the setting value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. display the current setting values saved in , and transmit a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

Further, when the setting key switch 112a is turned off from the ON state, when the confirmation end operation is performed, the display of the set values on the information display 113 is ended, and the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is ended. Perform processing to end the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation is being performed is performed. Specifically, a setting checking screen indicating that the setting is being checked is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and predetermined light emission is performed while the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are checking the setting. All the lights are lit in a color (for example, white). Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Confirming the setting value”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (0 clears) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 130, the processing for ending the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification is performed.

"Power restoration notification" is notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before power interruption, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect) at the time of power restoration on the image display devices 70 and 71 symbol “135”), or the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are fully lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 to output a power recovery notification sound ("power has been restored" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power failure) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the notification of power recovery, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the power has been restored.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a indicates other commands (first special symbol reserved number (U1), special symbol storage specification command indicating second special symbol reserved number (U2), normal symbol reserved number (G)). Ordinary symbol storage designation command, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures and the number of reserved normal figures, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70 is performed. will be done.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol and the special symbol determination random number value. An initial value random value update process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply substrate 160. If the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S24 to detect power failure. If a signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupts, performs processing to clear the output port in step S28, and clears the game RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c in step S29. ) are calculated and saved in the game RWM area, and in step S30, a backup flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S31, Processing for prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the system waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, multiple conditions (operations) are set for setting change operations, making it difficult to change settings easily. It is possible to

In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to be performed, and to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, so that the game machine may perform unexpected operations, causing inconvenience to the game store and players. It becomes possible to improve the reliability of the game machine.

Also, if the value in the setting value area is not within the proper range, that is, if there is a possibility that the previous power failure occurred while the settings were being changed, unrecoverable error processing is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game by pressing the button, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game from progressing in a state where the setting value not intended by the game arcade is set. Become.

In addition, during setting change (setting change mode) or setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the lighting device for the frame are displayed on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. 10 and the board illumination device 76, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed, and on the back side (rear side), it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113. ing. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

Note that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the number of conditions increases, fraud can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

Also, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and it is determined that there has been no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing will be performed. is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program and the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area. Then, the process may be moved to step S13.

Also, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (that is, the power is restored) and that there is no setting change operation, and if it is determined that the checksum is abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program and the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area. , the process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

Also, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the game program calculates the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c. may be calculated. In this case, the calculated checksum should be saved in the information RWM area.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing may be performed.

Also, the setting change designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the setting change processing is completed. However, instead of the setting change designation command, the setting change start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process ends.

Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clearing process is performed after the setting is changed, but the RWM clearing process may be performed before the setting is changed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the special game timer counter such as update processing of the special symbol time counter, opening time of the special electric accessory, etc. , update processing of normal symbol time counter, update processing of opening and closing time of movable member 48, and other time control processing for updating various timer counters. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting opening timer counter, a starting opening closing timer counter, or the like is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a special symbol, a random number for determining a special symbol variation pattern, a random number for determining a hit, a random number for determining a normal symbol, and a normal symbol variation pattern. Performs specific random number update processing for updating the random number used. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the countermeasure The random value is newly updated by setting the initial value random value to be used as a new cycle initial value.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a sets the initial value random value for judging a big win, the initial random value for determining a special symbol, the initial random value for determining a hit determination, and the initial random value for determining a normal symbol in step S130. Initial value random value update process to be updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the normal winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the out ball detection switch 52a, and the like. Input control processing is performed to determine whether or not there is an input to each switch, and to set predetermined data if there is an input. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination (jackpot determination, etc.), special symbol display control, opening/closing control of the big winning opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), special symbol special electric control for controlling the game state, and the like. process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a carries out normal pattern memory determination (hit determination, etc.), display control of normal symbols, opening/closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. .

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, the type of the normal pattern loss is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or controls a prize ball counter (three prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter), and perform payout control processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120 . As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 .

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of magnetic anomaly or radio wave anomaly based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a. A magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination process for transmitting a command to the production control board 130 is performed. When the effect control board 130 receives a magnetic anomaly error designation command or an electric wave anomaly error designation command, it performs control for performing magnetic anomaly error notification or electric wave anomaly error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting opening/closing data to be output to the second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening/closing solenoid 51b to output. Winning opening opening/closing data, first special symbol display device 60, and special symbol display data output to second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data output to normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, and special design reservation display data to be output to the second special design reservation display device 64, data creation processing to create data such as normal design reservation display data to be output to the normal design reservation display device 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as the external information data created in step S700, the starting opening opening/closing data, and the big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol reserved display data and normal symbol reserved display data, and payout command transmission processing for sending the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 Also, an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after the interrupt is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the normal medium payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening starting opening) during normal gaming state, out during normal gaming state A process for counting the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a regardless of the game state, is performed.

It should be noted that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected even if the set values are changed (irrelevant to the set values). By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (a normal base value, which will be described later) from which the influence of the set value is eliminated, and it is possible to use it to grasp the performance of the gaming machine 1 .

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the RWM area for information is calculated. Save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of .

The game interval is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game interval two times before, and a normal base value in the game interval three times before A fourth area is provided for playing, and base values for four game intervals including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area are displayed on the information display device 113 while being switched every five seconds. Performs processing for setting performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays, and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, no timer interrupt is executed in the setting change process, RWM clear process, and setting confirmation process. Since the performance information is not displayed, the control load on the main control board 110 can be reduced.

Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. FIG. Also, the game ball counting process may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110 . Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. In this general winning hole detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43 or not. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, data indicating 10 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter (10 winning ball counter) for the general winning hole used for winning balls and updated. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole and updated (D←D+1), and then the normal winning hole detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning hole detecting switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detecting switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the big winning hole detection switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter for the big winning hole (15 winning ball counter) used for winning balls. The winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entering the winning hole is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1) to determine whether the jackpot game (special game) is currently in progress. determine whether When the jackpot game is currently in progress, the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have won the jackpot 50 is updated by adding "1" (C←C+1) to the jackpot. Terminate the detection switch input process.

If the current game state is not the special game state, the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific winning hole (second starting hole 47, big winning hole 50) outside the winning period. The counter (E) is updated by adding "1" (E←E+1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the fraudulent winning ball counter (E) is greater than a specified number (for example, 10), resulting in fraudulent winning. When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the big winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the fraudulent prize winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, it is assumed that the fraudulent prize winning (illegal prize winning) occurs outside the winning period, and an error for fraudulent prize winning is specified. Set the command in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the error designation command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 informs that the fraudulent winning has occurred by performing the fraudulent winning error notification.

Then, the external information data (output data) for outputting the illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect the large winning opening. End switch input processing. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to recognize (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. In this first starting hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first starting hole detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. In this second starting port detection switch input processing, substantially the same processing as the first starting port detection switch input processing shown in FIG. 6, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process is terminated.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal pattern reservations, which is the number of normal pattern reservation memories stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area, is less than four. When the number of general pattern reservations is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

If the normal pattern reservation number is less than 4, add "1" to the normal pattern reservation number and update it, normal pattern determination information (random number for hit judgment, normal pattern determination random value, normal pattern fluctuation pattern Random number for determination) is acquired, and the vacant storage units are searched in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and the acquired normal pattern judgment information is stored in the vacant storage unit and input. End the control process.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination information ( Random number for jackpot determination, random number for special pattern determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reserved number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area is less than four in step S230-4. When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, this first start End the mouth detection switch input process.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) and updates it (U1←U1+1). A first special symbol memory specifying command corresponding to the number of symbol reservations (U1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the first special symbol reserved number.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for free storage units from the first storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area, and stores acquired special symbol determination information in the free storage units. Remember.

As described above, in the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, and special figure variation pattern determination random values, etc.) will be stored.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-8. In this first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure determination information (first reservation storage) acquired this time is displayed before the special symbol fluctuation display based on the determination information is performed. A scheduled variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be determined and executed, is determined.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first start winning designation command corresponding to the scheduled variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process of step S230-8 in the effect transmission data storage area, and this time ends the first starting opening detection switch input process.

As a result, the scheduled variation pattern can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first starting point winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that receives the first starting point winning designation command receives the first starting point winning. A designated command is analyzed, and a predetermined notice performance is performed over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start winning prize designated command. can be executed. It should be noted that the pre-reading notice effect is one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the lighting device 10 for the frame, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the lighting device 76 for the board. is done using

In addition, regarding the second start opening detection switch input processing, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the first special symbol reservation storage area, the first reservation memory, the first special symbol reservation number (U1), the first special symbol storage designation command, first pre-determination process, first starting opening winning designation command, respectively, second starting opening detection switch 47a, second special symbol reservation storage area, second reservation storage, second special symbol reservation number (U2), second 2 special symbol storage specification command, second pre-determining process, second start opening winning a prize specification command may be replaced.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and stores the special symbol if the special figure special electric processing data=0. Determination processing (step S310) If the processing is transferred to the special symbol change processing (step S320) if the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2 special symbol stop processing (step S330), if the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the processing is moved to the big hit game processing (step S340), if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing goes to the jackpot game end processing (step S350) Transfer.

Since this "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as will be described later, the subroutines necessary for the game are appropriately processed. .

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination processing for determining a big hit, processing for determining the type of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, and processing for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbols.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, and if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more, To determine whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more (is "0") , the customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not the variable display of special symbols and the start of the customer waiting state in which the jackpot game is not executed (the waiting state in which the game is not progressing) is set to "0 ” is determined.

When the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", the customer waiting state designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area assuming that the customer waiting state has started, and while maintaining the special figure special electric processing data = 0, When the special symbol storage determination process is completed and the customer waiting state determination flag is not "0", the customer waiting state has already started, and the special symbol special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. Terminate the special symbol memory determination process.

When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, after subtracting "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area, in the second special symbol reservation storage area Various random numbers (special figure determination information) stored in a certain first storage unit to fourth storage unit are shifted to the previous storage unit, and the second corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number after subtraction (U2) 2 Set the special symbol memory specification command in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the second special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the second special symbol reserved number.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a big win determination (big win lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a big win game. Specifically, the random number for special symbol determination out of the various random numbers (special figure determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit in the second special symbol reservation storage area, the RWM area for the game Based on the set values (here 1 to 4) stored in the set value area and the current probability game state (low probability game state, high probability game state), the jackpot game will be executed. ” or “losing”.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, in the first special symbol reservation storage area After subtracting "1" from the stored value, various random values stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area are shifted to the previous storage unit, A first special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) after subtraction is set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the first special symbol reserved number.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a big win determination (big win lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a big win game. Specifically, the random number for special symbol determination out of the various random numbers (special figure determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area, the game RWM area Based on the set values (here 1 to 4) stored in the set value area and the current probability game state (low probability game state, high probability game state), the jackpot game will be executed. ” or “losing”.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol determination processing for determining the type of special symbols to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the big hit determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the value stored in the 0th storage unit A special jackpot pattern or a losing special pattern is determined based on the random number value for the jackpot pattern, and a performance design designation command corresponding to the determined special design is set in a transmission data storage area for performance. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the big hit determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the jackpot symbol stored in the 0th storage section is determined. A special pattern (big win special pattern, losing special pattern) is determined based on the random number value, and a performance design designation command corresponding to the determined special design is set in a performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols. Specifically, when the big hit determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the value stored in the 0th storage unit Based on the random number for reach determination and the random number for special figure variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the determined variation pattern A corresponding variation pattern specification command is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In addition, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the reach determination stored in the 0th storage unit The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number and the random number for special figure variation, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation pattern. The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets variable display data for causing the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 to perform variable display (blinking of the LED) of special symbols in a predetermined processing area. .

As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, data for lighting or extinguishing the LED is appropriately created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. Variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 .

Then, special symbol electric processing data=0 is set to special symbol electric processing data=1, preparations are made to move to a subroutine of special symbol variation processing, and the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is completed.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation processing for determining whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). If the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation processing is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=1.

When the fluctuation time has elapsed, the big winning special symbol or the losing special symbol determined in step S310 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, and is determined in advance. The stop time (0.5 seconds) of the received special symbol is set in the special symbol time counter. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the big hit determination.

Then, special symbol electric processing data=1 is set to special symbol electric processing data=2, preparations are made to move to a special symbol stop processing subroutine, and this special symbol variation processing is completed.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol stop processing to determine whether or not the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop time set in step S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). When the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop processing is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=2.

When the stop time has elapsed, when the number of times of time saving > 0, the time saving number counter is updated by subtracting 1, and when the number of times of time saving = 0, the time saving game flag is cleared, and when the number of times of high probability > 0, it is high. The probability number counter is updated by subtracting 1, and when the high probability number=0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. In the case of a jackpot special pattern, clear the time-saving game flag, high-probability game flag, time-saving number counter, and high-probability number counter, and set from special figure special electric processing data = 2 to special figure special electric processing data = 3 Then, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game processing, and the special symbol stop processing of this time is finished.

On the other hand, if the special pattern is lost, the special pattern special electric processing data is set to 0 from the special special electric processing data = 2, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special design storage determination processing, and the special design stop processing of this time is performed. exit.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a selects the first jackpot game, second jackpot game, or third jackpot game based on the type of jackpot special symbol set in step S310 (stopped symbol data). A jackpot game process is performed.

Specifically, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and the driving data of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening/closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the number of round games (R) storage area.

When a specified number of game balls win (enter a ball) during this opening, or the opening time of the big winning opening elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10, or special game timer counter = 0), a large The drive data output of the winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is stopped, and the opening/closing member 51 is closed. This completes one round game. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When the round game is completed a predetermined number of times (4 times or 16 times in this embodiment), the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 3 , the special figure special electric processing data is set to 4, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game end processing, and the jackpot game processing of this time is finished.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines either the high-probability game state or the low-probability game state, and also determines the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state. A jackpot game ending process is performed.

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special design (stop design data) set in step S310, the setting of the high probability game flag, the setting of the high probability number, the setting of the time saving game flag, and the setting of the number of time saving Then, the special figure special electric processing data = 4 is set to special figure special electric processing data = 0, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and the big hit game end processing of this time is completed.

(Description of commands related to the production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9 are diagrams showing types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the first special symbol reservation number (U1), and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases or decreases, the main RAM 110c It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

"Second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of second special symbol reservations (U2),
When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) increases or decreases, it is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the performance control board 130.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the "first special symbol memory designation command" and the "second special symbol memory designation command" may be collectively referred to as "special symbol memory designation command".

The "performance design specification command" indicates the type (kind) of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, and when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbols is started, the main RAM 110c is transmitted for performance. It is set in the data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In addition, since the type of the special pattern ultimately determines the type of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game ends, the production pattern designation command indicates the jackpot type and the game state after the jackpot ends. It can also be said.

The "first special symbol variation pattern specifying command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, and the first special symbol display device 60 displays the variation of the special symbol. is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110 c and transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

The "second special symbol variation pattern specification command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display device 61, and the second special symbol display device 61 displays the variation of the special symbol. is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110 c and transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

In this embodiment, the "first special symbol variation pattern specification command" and the "second special symbol variation pattern specification command" may be collectively referred to as "variation pattern specification command".

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed. , and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

"Normal design determination command" indicates that the normal design is stopped and displayed, and when the normal design is stopped and displayed on the normal design display device 62, it is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the production is performed. It is sent to the control board 130 .

The "start opening winning designation command" is for notifying the effect control board 130 in advance of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery), and the game ball wins the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47. When this is done, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110 c and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The "jackpot opening designation command" indicates the start of a jackpot game (special game), and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various jackpot games are started, and the production control board. 130.

The "round specifying command" indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the production control board 130 when the round game of the jackpot game is started. .

The "jackpot ending designation command" indicates that the jackpot game is to end, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various jackpot games are finished, and is transmitted to the production control board 130. be.

"Normal symbol storage designation command" indicates the normal symbol reserved number (G1), and when the value stored in the normal symbol reserved number (G1) storage area increases or decreases, the main RAM 110c stores performance transmission data. It is set in the area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The "general design specification command" indicates the type of normal design to be stopped and displayed on the normal design display device 62, and when various normal designs are determined and the variable display of the normal design is started, the main RAM 110c is stored. It is set in the performance transmission data storage area and transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

The "normal pattern variation specification command" indicates the normal symbol variation time on the normal symbol display device 62, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the normal symbol variation display is started. , is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The "winning opening designation command" indicates that a winning game (auxiliary game) starts, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the winning game starts, and the production control board 130 sent to.

The "winning ending specifying command" indicates that various auxiliary games end, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the winning game ends, and is transmitted to the production control board 130. be.

The "game state designation command" indicates whether it is a time-saving game state or whether it is a high-probability game state. ), and at the end of the jackpot, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110 c and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The 'power-on designation command' and 'power-restoration designation command' indicate whether power-on of the gaming machine 1 is accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. When it is turned ON, whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized, and a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command corresponding to the game state are transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "customer waiting state designation command" indicates that a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not performed is entered, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the customer waiting state is entered. and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The "error designation command" indicates that an error has occurred in the game machine 1 and the type of error. When it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred in the above-described big winning opening detection switch input process or the above-described second start opening detection switch input process, it is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the production control board 130 sent to.

Also, when the payout control board 120 detects the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4, the fullness of the lower tray 12, or the payout abnormality, it is set in the payout RAM 121c performance transmission data storage area, and is set in the performance control board 120. 130.

The "error release designation command" indicates that an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c or payout RAM 121c when the resolution of various abnormalities is detected. and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The "set value designation command" indicates the set value set in the game machine 1. Specifically, after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is executed. After being transmitted, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

(Main processing of production control unit)
Next, the main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the effect control section 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 130b, flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing for updating various random values stored in the sub-RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
Timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a timer interrupt process that is executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the production button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and performs processing of setting predetermined data when there is an input.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, it determines whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change/confirmation processing in step E170. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received. Processing for executing change notification is performed, and when the setting confirmation designation command is received, processing for executing the above-described setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power-on designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power-on notification is performed. Specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), For example, the power-on sound is output from the voice output device 9 .

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power failure restoration notification is performed. Specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 to display a power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), A power restoration sound is output from the voice output device 9 . note that,

In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a customer-waiting state designation command has been received, and if the command has been received, processing for performing a customer-waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined time has elapsed is performed. conduct. Specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140, and a customer waiting demo screen is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). , the voice output device 9 outputs a customer waiting demonstration sound. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 12 .

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state designation command has been received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c when the command has been received. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending information update process in step E400. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command is received, and if received, the second stored in the sub-RAM 130c. 1 special design reservation number, second special design reservation number, normal design reservation number, etc. are updated.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead effect process. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not a start-point winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command is received. Processing related to production, continuous advance notice production, and lamp change production is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 .

The “icon change effect” is a type of preview effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed by changing the display mode of the pending icon and the icon. In the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a suspended icon may be referred to as a "suspended icon change effect", and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as a "pertinent icon change effect".

A “continuous advance notice effect” is a type of foreseeing advance notice effect that makes a player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.
"Lamp change effect" is a kind of fore-reading forewarning effect that makes a player expect a big win game to be executed by changing the lighting mode of the prize winning hole lamp over one or more variable effects.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a special special electric effect process. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a performance design designation command, a special design variation pattern designation command, a special design decision command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command, etc. is received, and processing is performed to execute an effect corresponding to the received command if received.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a carries out a general/universal electric presentation process. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, whether the general pattern designation command, general pattern variation designation command, normal pattern determination command, opening designation command for winning, and ending designation command for winning, etc. are received It determines whether or not, and performs processing for executing an effect corresponding to the received command when it is received.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if received, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. and end the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it outputs signals such as predetermined data, and transmits various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150. .

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting effect processing of the effect control unit)
The customer waiting effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E300-1. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state designation command has been received, in step E300-2, until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect. selects the demonstration waiting time determination table (see FIG. 13) for determining the waiting time of Details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demonstration standby time and sets the demonstration standby timer. Specifically, the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is referred to, and one demonstration standby time is determined from a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration is on standby. Specifically, it is determined whether the demonstration standby timer is set. If it is not on standby for a demonstration, the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not executed, and if it is on standby for a demonstration, the demonstration standby timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. .

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration standby timer=0 in step E300-6. If the demo standby timer is not equal to 0, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not yet executed, and the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the present customer waiting effect processing is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting demonstration effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the customer waiting demo effect for appealing to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demonstration waiting time determination table)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

The game state, the current state, and the selected demo waiting time are associated with each other in the demonstration waiting time determination table shown in FIG. There are 4 types of demo standby time from 30 seconds to 70 seconds for the normal game state, and 4 types of demo standby time from 35 seconds to 75 seconds for the specific game state. is set.

A first feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. Demonstration standby time after is displayed statically, demonstration standby time after the variable display of the production pattern is finished (variation time has passed) and the production design is statically displayed, and production design after the end of the customer waiting demo production is different from the demonstration standby time after is displayed still. By doing so, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demonstration standby time after the time has passed and the production pattern is statically displayed is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demonstration standby time after static display of the effect pattern on the image display device immediately after is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demo standby time after the design is statically displayed is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demonstration standby time after the performance symbol is statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance is the shortest. By doing so, it is possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to the player, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

As a sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Prefetching effect processing of the effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 14, the look-ahead effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the effect mode of the icon change effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 15 .

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changes the display mode of the pending icon already displayed or the icon). Perform update processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs continuous announcement effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, the effect mode of the continuous announcement effect, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous announcement effect execution process for executing the continuous announcement effect determined to be executed in the continuous announcement effect determination process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process for executing a lamp change effect (lighting the winning entrance lamp NR so as to have a light emission mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed). Terminate the look-ahead effect processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command from the main control board 110 in step E510-1. When the start opening winning designation command is received, the process is moved to step E510-2, and when the starting opening winning designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received starting opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is during the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-8.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, when the received starting opening winning designation command is based on the winning to the first starting opening 45, the normal game state, and the received starting opening winning designation command is for winning to the second starting opening 47 If it is based on, it may be provided that it is a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a determines that all of the pre-determination results of the pre-reservation (pre-reservation storage corresponding to the previously received start-up winning designation command) are normal reach or less, that is, all the pre-determination results of the pre-reservation are normally fluctuating, Decide whether it is shortened variation or normal reach. If all are equal to or less than the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-5, and if none is equal to or less than the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of an icon to be additionally displayed on first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-6. , selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 16) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. , to determine one final icon display mode from among a plurality of final icon display modes.

In step E510-8, sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (CD icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If it is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-10, and if it is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 17) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17, based on the final display mode of the icon, the number of pending memories of the special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario to determine one change scenario from a plurality of change scenarios.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and selects the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, second winning sound when displayed as a special icon) is output.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is displayed, or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all the preliminary determination results of the precedence suspension are equal to or less than the normal reach. Alternatively, the icon change performance may be executed when the preliminary determination result of the preceding suspension is not to perform the ready-to-win performance, and the icon change performance may not be executed when the ready-to-win performance is to be performed. In this way, the change in the display mode of the pending icon does not occur during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the hold icon during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. change of the display mode occurs, the ready-to-win effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, even if the result of the preliminary determination of the precedent hold includes the ready-to-reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the result of the preliminary determination of the precedent hold includes the ready-to-reach effect. The icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) in the case where there is no ready-to-win effect than in the case where the ready-to-win effect is included.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode.

The final icon display mode determination table is associated with the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the start winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of the final display mode of each icon, and the final display mode of the icon to be selected.

The final icon display mode includes a CD icon as a normal icon, and a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character as special icons that indicate the possibility of a big win (a big win game will be played). icon is set.

The degree of expectation for winning the jackpot related to the special icon is higher in the order of (CD icon<) blue character icon<red character icon<rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that confirms a big win. .

Here, as a main feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the scheduled variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is at a higher rate than when the scheduled variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not become reach. Like to be selected.

In the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, the normal icon (CD icon) is not selected as the final icon display mode in the case of a big win, but it may be selected. .

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the final display mode of the icon, the reserved memory number of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected. , and for reference, prior changes in each change scenario and the mode of icon update in the changes are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting entrance winning designation command. , "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting opening winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the change (the icon change effect is executed). Scenarios (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed) but do not change during execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed), and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation and during execution of the variation (suspended icon change effect and icon change effect are executed ) scenarios (for example, scenario 15, etc.) are set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, the scenario in which the icon display mode is changed is determined regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win effect (may be a reach other than the normal reach) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed according to a change scenario determination table in which whether or not a ready-to-win effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed in advance fluctuation is executed is a determination factor. You may make it determine the scenario to which it makes. When such a change scenario determination table is used, there is no change in the display mode of the icon during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. It is preferable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, a change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed and the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the change in the display mode of the icon occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the advance variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon display mode update processing of effect control unit)
The icon display mode update processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing icon display mode update processing in the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E520-1. When the variation pattern designation command is received, the process proceeds to step E520-2, and when the variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3 determines whether or not the icon change scenario is stored. . If no icon change scenario is stored, the change scenario is cleared from the sub-RAM 130c. moves the process to step E520-4.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a pending icon that changes (updates) the display mode in the current variable effect. If there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-5, and if there is no pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-8.

In step E520-5, sub CPU 130a selects the change pattern determination table for pending icon (see FIG. 19) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the pending icon to be changed. The details of the pending icon change pattern determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-6. Specifically, referring to the pending icon change pattern determination table shown in FIG. , determines one pending icon change pattern.

In step E520-7, sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the first image display device 70 is changed according to the change timing according to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the hold icon displayed on the (main liquid crystal) is changed, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

In step E520-8, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process proceeds to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon display mode updating process is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects from among a plurality of change pattern determination tables for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed, the A change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 20 and 21) for the icon is selected according to the change stage in which the icon changes. Details of the change pattern determination table for the icon corresponding to the change stage will be described later.

In step E520-10, the sub-CPU 130a performs a power-off time control function for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect as compensation for the icon change effect that may not have been executed due to the occurrence of power restoration. The icon change pattern determination table (FIG. 22) is selected. The details of the icon change pattern determination table for power failure will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-11. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon, a plurality of the icons are selected based on the mode of change of the icon in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from the change patterns.

In step E520-12, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon display mode update process. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the first image display device 70 is changed according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the icon displayed on the (main liquid crystal) is changed, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

As described above, according to the icon display mode updating process shown in FIG. 18, when the power is restored during execution of the icon change effect, when the icon change effect is executed again in the fluctuation effect that is started after the power is restored. There seems to be By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction that accompanies the termination of the icon change effect due to the occurrence of power restoration, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the icon display mode update process shown in FIG. 18, even if the icon change effect is executed again in the change effect that is started after the power is restored, the icon change effect is performed based on the current change pattern. By newly determining the mode, it is not executed from the continuation of the change scenario before power restoration (the stage suggested before the power supply was stopped). By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect in accordance with the content of the current variation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, if the power supply recovery occurs during the execution of the icon change effect, in the fluctuation effect that starts after the power is restored, the pending memory (special figure determination information) prior to the pending memory (special figure determination information) that triggered the execution of the icon change effect ( The icon change effect may not be executed in the variable effect corresponding to the special figure determination information), and the icon change effect may be executed in the variable effect corresponding to the pending memory that triggered the execution of the icon change effect.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a pending icon change pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a pending icon change pattern.

The pending icon change pattern determination table is associated with the mode of pending icon change in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the pending icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the pending icon change effect generation timing and change stages in each pending icon change pattern are described.

As for the hold icon change pattern, normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shift-displayed (at the start of fluctuation) in response to the disappearance of the icon. , a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes while fluctuating with the output of a sound effect, and when a character appears, an action effect that acts on the icon is performed with the character as the starting point, and the icon is displayed. A character effect change pattern 01 in which the mode changes and a change notification pattern indicating that the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the variable effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and an effect effect acting on the reserved icon starting from the change notification pattern. is set to change the display mode of the pending icon.

The change effect generation timing of the pending icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect, and when the variable effect is started (at the start of the variable effect), during the execution of the variable effect (during fluctuation), and the effect pattern When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

In the change stage of the pending icon, there is a 1UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot changes to a display mode that is one step higher, and a jackpot icon. A 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon) is set to change the display mode of the winning expectation to two levels higher.

Although the above-described three timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the pending icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
20 and 21 are diagrams showing a change pattern determination table for the icon to be referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. FIG. 21 is a table referred to when changing the display mode of the icon by two stages.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of change of the icon in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change patterns include a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes at the start of fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes during fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect. There are set a change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 in which when a character appears, an action effect acting on the icon is performed with the character as a starting point, and the display mode of the icon changes.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the state of progress of the change effect. When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the icon includes a 1UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot changes to a display mode one level higher, and a jackpot icon. 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon, etc.) is set to change the display mode of the winning expectation to two levels higher.

Although the pattern effect change pattern 01 is not selected in the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, it may be selected. For example, in the variation effect for performing the pseudo-continuous effect, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Pseudo continuous effect" is a variable display of the effect pattern as if it were multiple times for the big hit determination based on the winning (entering the ball) to the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) once. In order to make it look as if it was executed, all within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (entering the ball) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) It is a variable display of a special effect design in which a re-variation display for starting a change again after the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped is executed once or a plurality of times.

Although the above-mentioned two timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Relevant icon change pattern determination table for power failure)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an icon change pattern determination table for power failure, which is referred to when determining the icon change pattern.

The icon change pattern determination table for the time of power failure contains the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command, the final display mode of the icon, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, and the icon to be selected. and the icon change pattern to be selected are associated with each other, and for reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

It should be noted that the icon change pattern, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon, and the change stage of the icon are the same as those described in the change pattern determination table for the icon described above, so descriptions thereof are omitted here. do.

(Relationship of change effect occurrence frequency between pending icon display mode and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the appearance frequency of the pending icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing.

When the display mode of the pending icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command. ing.

Further, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. getting low.

In other words, when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command, the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received. It can be said that the display mode of is likely to change to the blue character icon.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. getting higher.

Further, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to a red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command. getting low.

In other words, when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the holding icon is more effective than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command. It can be said that the display mode of is likely to change to a red character icon. It should be noted that this predetermined command is a starting entry winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command is that the game ball wins the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) and the pending icon is displayed. It is a change effect (change effect at the time of winning) in which the reserved icon is displayed as a special icon at the timing of winning, and a normal change pattern 01.
Also, the change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command is the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01.

Since the relationship between the pending icon display mode and the change effect generation frequency is the relationship as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command is better than the predetermined command Since the frequency of the change effect of changing to a red character icon with a higher expectation of winning a big win than the frame update timing according to the reception of the is high, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change effect occurrence timing, improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

Also, since the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command has a higher frequency of occurrence of the change effect of changing to the blue character icon than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurs earlier. In addition, although it is difficult to change to a red character icon with a high expectation of winning a jackpot, it is easy to change to a blue character icon, so that the player can pay attention to the subsequent variation performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Relationship 1 between the type of change effect and the frequency of occurrence of change effect and the timing of occurrence of change effect)
FIG. 23(b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the changing effect occurrence frequency between the changing effect type and the changing effect occurrence timing.

When the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher for the pending icon change effect than for the icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the icon change effect is lower than that of the pending icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the type of change effect and the frequency of occurrence of change effect and the timing of occurrence of change effect has the relationship as described above, the pending icon is likely to change at an early stage of the change effect. It is possible to draw out the expectations of the players for the jackpot game over a long period of time, and to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that this predetermined command is a starting entry winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

(Relationship 2 between the type of change effect and the frequency of occurrence of change effect and the timing of occurrence of change effect)
FIG. 23(c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 of the changing effect generation frequency between the changing effect type and the changing effect generation timing.

When the change effect occurs at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the frequency of occurrence of the icon change effect is higher than that of the pending icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the pending icon change effect is lower than that of the icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence frequency of the change effect occurrence timing has the relationship as described above, the icon is likely to change in the late period of the change effect, so the game It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by drawing the expectation of the player to the big winning game until the time when the variation presentation is late.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon occurs (changes))
FIG. 23D is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

When the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first generated notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated. A second generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound when an icon is generated (changed). A third generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound at the time of change), and when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, a fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound at the time of icon change. is set to be output.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for a plurality of icon display modes (four types). , and a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon. Alternatively, when the CD icon is generated, the notification sound is not output, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes in any manner. You may make it output. Also, for the rainbow character icon that is determined to be a big hit, three types of special change notification sounds may be provided.

(Continuous notice effect determination processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing continuous announcement effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command from the main control board 110 in step E530-1. When the starting opening winning designation command is received, the process is moved to step E530-2, and when the starting opening winning designation command is not received, the current continuous announcement effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received starting opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is during which the continuous announcement effect can be executed. If it is during the continuous advance notice performance executable period, the process is moved to step E530-4, and if it is not the continuous notice performance executable period, the process is moved to step E530-6 assuming that the continuous announcement performance is not executed. .

The 'executable period of the continuous advance notice effect' means that the jackpot game is not being executed, the continuous notice effect is not being executed, and the continuous notice effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, when the received starting opening winning designation command is based on the winning to the first starting opening 45, the normal game state, and the received starting opening winning designation command is for winning to the second starting opening 47 If it is based on, it may be provided that it is a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the announcement scenario determination table (see FIG. 25) for determining the announcement scenario of the continuous announcement effect. Details of the advance notice scenario determination table will be described later. This advance notice scenario indicates the transition of the advance notice effect over one or more variable effects.

In step E530-5, the sub CPU 130a determines the announcement scenario, sets it in the pre-reading information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current continuous announcement effect determination process. Specifically, referring to the notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, one announcement scenario is determined from a plurality of announcement scenarios (including non-announcement scenarios). Details of the advance notice scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-notice scenario in which the continuous announcement effect is not executed, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current continuous announcement effect determination process. do.

(Advance scenario decision table)
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an advance notice scenario determination table referred to when deciding an advance notice scenario for continuous advance notice effects.

The announcement scenario determination table contains the number of reserved memories of special symbols corresponding to the starting entry winning designation command, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the starting opening winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each announcement scenario, and the announcement scenario to be selected. are associated with each other, and for reference, the advance fluctuation in each advance notice scenario and the effect mode of the advance notice effect in the change are described.

The advance notice scenarios include a non-announcement scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which an effect image is displayed around the performance design 70a at the start of the variable production, and an effect image is displayed around the production design 70a at the start of the advance fluctuation. is not displayed, but an effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a at the start of the variation (for example, scenario 01), at the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and at the start of the variation, the effect around the production pattern 70a A scenario in which an image is displayed (for example, scenario 02, etc.) is set.

(Continuous notice effect execution processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect execution processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing continuous advance notice effect execution processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E540-1. When the variation pattern specification command is received, the process is moved to step E540-2, and when the variation pattern specification command is not received, the current continuous announcement effect execution process is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the announcement scenario of the continuous announcement effect stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E540-3 determines whether or not the announcement scenario is stored. . If the advance notice scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E540-4, and if the advance notice scenario is not stored, the advance notice scenario is cleared from the sub-RAM 130c. E540-6 is processed.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines a continuous announcement pattern (effect mode) corresponding to the announcement scenario, and in step E540-5 sets a continuous announcement effect command corresponding to the determined continuous announcement pattern in the transmission buffer. . As a result, the continuous notice performance command is transmitted to the display/sound control section 140 and the lamp/driving control section 150, the continuous notice performance is executed according to the continuous notice pattern, and the performance pattern 70a is executed at the start of the variable performance. An effect image is displayed around the , or a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E540-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the alternative notice pattern determination table (Fig. 27) to determine the notice pattern. Specifically, the selected alternative notice pattern determination table is referred to, and based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command and the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, one alternative is selected from a plurality of alternative notice patterns. Determine the warning pattern. The details of the alternative notice pattern determination table will be described later.

"Alternative notice effect" is a effect to compensate for the continuous notice effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration (power outage), and multiple mini characters with different expectations for big wins are displayed on the image display device. It is a kind of advance notice effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed by displaying any of them.

In step E540-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined alternative notice pattern is for executing the alternative notice effect. If the alternative notice effect is not to be executed, the current continuous notice effect execution processing is terminated as if the alternative notice effect is not to be executed, and if the alternative notice effect is to be executed, the alternative notice pattern is executed. An alternative notice effect command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current continuous notice effect execution processing is terminated. As a result, the alternative notice effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the alternative notice effect is executed according to the alternative notice pattern. is displayed, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

As described above, according to the continuous notice effect execution processing shown in FIG. 26, when the power supply is restored (power failure) during execution of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is resumed in the variable effect that is started after the power is restored. Instead, an alternative notice effect different from the continuous notice effect may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with the end of the continuous announcement effect due to the occurrence of power restoration (power failure), and to improve the interest of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an alternative notice pattern determination table referred to when deciding an alternative notice pattern.

In the alternative notice pattern determination table, the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, and the selected alternative notice pattern are associated. The presentation mode in the pattern is described.

The alternative notice patterns include a pattern 00 in which no alternative notice effect is executed, a pattern 01 in which the mini character A is displayed on the image display device, a pattern 02 in which the mini character B is displayed on the image display device, and a mini character C is displayed on the image display device. A pattern 03 is set in which a mini-character D is displayed on the image display device.

The degree of expectation for winning a big win related to mini-characters is higher in the order of mini-character A<mini-character B<mini-character C<mini-character D, and mini-character D is a mini-character that is sure to win a big win.

The first feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that an alternative notice effect is executed in a variation pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot rather than a variation pattern with a low expectation of winning a jackpot. One reason is that the pattern is easily determined. By doing so, the alternative notice effect is executed when there is a high possibility that the continuous notice effect was executed before the power restoration occurred, and the dissatisfaction accompanying the end of the continuous notice effect is reduced. It can be reduced, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the execution trigger of the continuous notice effect. The alternative notice pattern for executing the alternative notice performance is more likely to be determined than when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that does not trigger the execution of the continuous notice performance prior to the suspension is executed. By doing so, after the power supply is restored, it becomes easy to grasp which variable performance is the variable performance corresponding to the holding that triggered the execution of the continuous notice performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, in the variable effect that is executed after the power supply is restored, it is decided whether or not to execute the later-described big hit notice effect (serif notice effect, step-up notice effect), so the execution of the big hit notice effect By increasing the probability more than usual, the alternative notice effect may not be executed.

Even in this case, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the execution trigger of the continuous notice effect before the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect. It is preferable to make it easier to execute the big hit announcement performance than when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that is not set is executed. In this way, after the power is restored, it becomes easy to grasp which variable performance corresponds to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous advance notice performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E550-2 assuming that the icon change effect is to be executed. Assuming that the power supply is cleared, the process proceeds to step E550-6.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is time to change the icon. If it is the icon change timing, the process proceeds to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning entrance lamp NR changes corresponding to the color change of the icon, thereby executing the lamp change effect. will be

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. When the ramp changing flag is set, the current ramp changing effect execution processing is terminated, and when the ramp changing flag is not set, the ramp changing flag is set and the ramp changing effect is executed this time. End the execution process.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process proceeds to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current ramp change effect execution process is terminated.

At step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, at step E550-8 sets a ramp effect end command in the transmission buffer, and executes the current ramp change effect execution process. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp/driving control section 150, and the lamp change effect being executed is terminated.

As described above, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 28, the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the prize winning entrance lamp NR is changed in correspondence with the change of the icon in the icon change effect. It is designed to perform a performance. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance effect by synergistic effect with the icon change performance, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution processing shown in FIG. 28, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous notice effect, even if the power is restored during the execution of the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed again. or not to execute the alternative notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to secure the rarity of the ramp change effect while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when power restoration occurs like the icon change production, the lamp change production may be executed again in the fluctuation production started after the power is restored. In this case, it is preferable to execute the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that starts after the power is restored.

Further, instead of executing the lamp change performance corresponding to the icon change performance, the final light emission mode of the winning entrance lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the previous change to the relevant change, etc. are determined by lottery, and the lamp change performance is executed. You may do so.

(Jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 29, the jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination processing in the effect control unit 130m. process).

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern executed in the current variable performance, and in step E650-2, the forewarning pattern of the jackpot foretelling performance that makes the player expect that the jackpot game will be executed. A jackpot prediction determination table (see FIG. 30) is selected to determine a prediction pattern. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot notice determination table shown in FIG. 30, a plurality of notice patterns (non-prediction patterns ) is determined. Details of the jackpot announcement determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a forewarning pattern for executing a dialogue forewarning effect. If it is the announcement pattern for executing the speech announcement effect, the process moves to step E650-4, and if it is not the announcement pattern for executing the dialogue announcement effect, the process moves to step E650-6.

"Dialogue notice effect" means that, in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period that occurs during the variable effect, a dialog image suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win is displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device is displayed. It is a kind of jackpot announcement effect in which a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from 9. Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed (the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high) than when the jackpot game is not executed, the dialogue with the relatively high expectation is displayed. When a line with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, the effect button 17 vibrates, for example, for one second.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the dialogue pattern in the dialogue preview effect, and determines the dialogue pattern. Specifically, referring to the dialogue pattern determination table, one dialogue pattern is selected from a plurality of dialogue patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variation production pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each dialogue pattern. decide.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a sets a speech announcement effect command corresponding to the speech pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialog preview effect command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the dialog preview effect corresponding to the dialog pattern is executed. is displayed, and audio corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9 .

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a notice pattern for executing a step-up notice effect. If it is the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process is shifted to step E650-7, and if it is not the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the current jackpot notice effect determination processing is terminated.

“Step-up notice effect” is a jackpot notice effect that executes step effects in a predetermined order until one of a plurality of steps (stages) from the first step (first stage) to the final step (final stage). It is one kind. Specifically, more step effects are more likely to be executed when the big win game is executed (higher expectation for the big win) than when the big win game is not executed.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the step-up pattern in the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up pattern. Specifically, referring to the step-up pattern determination table, one step-up pattern is selected from among a plurality of step-up patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variation production pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each step-up pattern. Decide on a step-up pattern.

In step E650-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current jackpot notice effect determination process. As a result, the step-up notice effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the step-up notice effect corresponding to the step-up pattern is executed. Step images are displayed on the screen, and sound effects corresponding to the step images are output from the audio output device 9 .

(Jackpot notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a big-hit announcement effect determination process referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the big-hit announcement effect.

The jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be selected are associated with the big win notice determination table.

The notice pattern includes a notice pattern without notice, a notice pattern in which a dialogue notice effect is executed, and a notice pattern in which a step-up notice effect is executed. The degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is higher when the up notice effect is executed.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing main processing of the integrated control unit 141. As shown in FIG.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the supervising CPU 142, and the supervising CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, in step T1, the supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and in step T2, performs initialization processing. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the general ROM 143, the flags and the like stored in the general RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step T3, and refers to the reception buffer of the supervising RAM 144 in step T4 to determine whether or not the effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 130m. If it is not received, the process proceeds to step T7, and if it is received, in step T5, an animation pattern is determined and set from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command. Perform animation pattern setting processing.

The production instruction commands include a customer waiting production command, an icon display command, a change production command, a variation production pattern command, a pattern stop pattern command, an opening production pattern command, a round production pattern command, an ending production pattern command, and the like.

In addition, the animation group includes the type of objects that make up the effect image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) for displaying the effect image, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns, which are specified (specified) information such as parameters (sprite image display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information specifying the image display device that displays the effect image, etc. It is a group formed by being

The types of animation groups include, for example, a production pattern group for displaying the animation of the production pattern 70a, an icon group for displaying a pending icon or animation of the icon, and a variable production animation such as a background or character. , a notice effect group for displaying an animation such as a notice, a special game effect group for displaying an animation for a special game effect, and the like.

In step T6, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound setting processing for determining and setting a sound pattern from the sound group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in step T7, updates the effect image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is time to update the frame (to draw a new effect image). If there is, the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the supervising CPU 142 performs display list generation/output processing for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands and outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for shaping effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Alternatively, it is generated for each frame of a plurality of units (frame update timing), and in this embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each set animation pattern in the animation control process, which will be described later, a drawing control command is set according to the content of the animation scene information for each set animation pattern. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current frame number is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group with the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group with the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set for the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. , but the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the supervising CPU 142 performs drawing command processing for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw the effect image based on the output display list. By executing this drawing command process, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer is transferred to the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are displayed.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound list generation/output processing for generating a sound list composed of sound control commands and outputting the generated sound list to the sound control unit 148. FIG.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for specifying sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9. When outputting a new sound, It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound control unit 148 to output sound based on the output sound list. By executing this sound output command process, the sound control unit 148 causes the sound output device 9 to output sounds based on the sound list.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to synchronize (tune) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP). Output from the audio output device 9 is terminated.

The output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 is started so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing. may be stopped or vice versa.

In step T13, the supervising CPU 142 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (addresses) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then proceeds to step T4. After that, the processing from step T4 to step T13 is repeated in a loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit)
Command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141, and this processing is executed by receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

In step T20, the overall CPU 142 performs command reception processing for receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 130m. Specifically, the process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the general RAM 144 is performed, and the current command reception interrupt process is terminated.

(V blank interrupt processing of integrated control unit)
V blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing V blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141. In the V blank interrupt processing, display of one frame of effect image from the image control unit 145 (VDP) ends (1/30 It is executed each time (1/30th of a second = approximately 33 ms) a V blank signal transmitted every second (approximately 33 ms) is received.

In step T30, the supervising CPU 142 performs counter update processing for updating various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, adding "1"), and in step T31, the image control unit 145 ( VDP), frame buffer switching instruction processing is performed to instruct switching between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 .

As a result, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are changed to the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms). will switch alternately.

In step T32, the supervising CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has switched, and terminates the current V blank interrupt processing. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes of steps T8 to T13 are executed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart of the change effect at the time of winning)
34 and 35 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed (changed to) the blue character icon when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 and wins.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 280th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal change period in which the normal change of the effect pattern 70a is performed. At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 280th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, a start opening winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control section 130m based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 45 .

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 281st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, it is determined that the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed as a blue character icon at the time of winning, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second generated notification sound is generated from the voice output device 9. output does not start.

Also, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen b is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 282nd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is started. . The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 283rd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data e (background image, various variable effects images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. be.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 284th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image data e drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. be.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 296th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display), and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 continues.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 297th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. Also, drawing of the image data i (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image display device of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer. display is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 298th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data i drawn to the second frame buffer is displayed. Display on the device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second generated notification sound in synchronization with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , compared to the case where the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generated notification sound start with a lag in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

Also, while the output of the second generated notification sound was started in synchronization with the frame update timing when the blue character icon was displayed, the blue character icon was erased and the second generated notification sound was output. Since this is done at a frame update timing different from the stop of , the output of the second generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the blue character icon, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Example of change production at the time of winning)
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed (changed to) a blue character icon when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 and wins.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), the production pattern 70a is variably displayed in a state in which the first pending icon and the second pending icon are not displayed, that is, in a state in which no pending memory is stored. A normal variation effect is being executed.

Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting hole 45, a starting hole winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m, icon change effect determination processing is executed, and a change scenario is performed. Suppose that "scenario 02" (the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed with a blue character icon when winning a prize) is determined.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 36(b), in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45, the first pending icon (blue character The icon) H11 is displayed, and the second notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(c), a combination (here, "234") indicating that the performance symbol 70a that has been variably displayed is a failure is stopped and displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(d), the performance pattern 70a starts to be variably displayed, and the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36(e), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and the central variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is variably displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stop-displayed in the central variable display area, thereby ending the ready-to-win effect and also ending the variable display. Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Although not shown, BGM, sound effects, and the like are output from the audio output device 9 during the variable presentation. The same applies to subsequent FIGS. 39, 42, 43, 46, and 47. FIG.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
37 and 38 are timings showing various timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the blue character icon. Chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 600th frame after the start of the variable effect and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period during which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, drawing of image data b (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 600th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, a variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control section 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 601st frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the normal change pattern 01 to change the first pending icon to a blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 generates the second sound. The output of the notification sound does not start either.

Also, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the stop effect display screen b is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the next variable effect (timing at which the variable effect is started). At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is started. . The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the second frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data e (background image, various variable effects images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display), and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 continues. .

The timing of T6 is the timing of the third frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image data e drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display), and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 continues. .

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display), and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 continues.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 16th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data i (background image, dynamic effect image, various patterns) to the second frame buffer image, various icon images, etc.) is started, the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 17th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data i drawn to the second frame buffer is displayed. Display on the device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second generated notification sound in synchronization with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , compared to the case where the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generated notification sound start with a lag in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

Also, while the output of the second generated notification sound was started in synchronization with the frame update timing when the blue character icon was displayed, the blue character icon was erased and the second generated notification sound was output. Since this is done at a frame update timing different from the stop of , the output of the second generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the blue character icon, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Example of production of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when changing the display mode of the first pending icon to a blue character icon (normal change pattern 01) at the start of fluctuation (during shift).

As shown in FIG. 39(a), when the first pending icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, , and the stop display of the production pattern indicating the loss is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39(b), the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2. H11 and H12 are shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 displayed in the second display portion 70B2 is changed and displayed to a blue character icon when shifted and displayed in the first display portion 70B1. In addition, the CD icon is changed to a blue character icon, and the voice output device 9 outputs the second notification sound for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39(c), a stop display is performed with a combination (here, "164") indicating that the performance symbol 70a that has been variably displayed is lost, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39(d), the effect symbol 70a starts to be variably displayed, and the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39(e), while the production pattern 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a that has been variably displayed, the central fluctuation display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is variably displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39(f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stop-displayed in the central variable display area, thereby ending the ready-to-win effect and also ending the variable display. Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart of character effect change pattern 01)
40 and 41 are timings showing various timings when the character effect change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process, and the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon. Chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variable performance (timing of starting the variable performance), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the performance symbol 70a is performed. . At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 61st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the effect control unit 130m has decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the icon TH to a red character icon, but the character or the like is not displayed on the image display device, and the voice The output of the third generated notification sound from the output device 9 also does not start.

At timing T2, the image data d (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the second frame buffer, and is drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been displayed on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 62nd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data e (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image that was drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data d on the image display device is started, and the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen d (character display). not started.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 63rd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data f (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data e on the image display device is started, and the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen e (character display). is continued.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 64th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data g (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image that was drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data f on the image display device is started, and the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen f (character display). is continued.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 91st frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen g (character display) is displayed on the image display device. be.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 92nd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data i (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data h drawn to the first frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen h (red character icon display), and the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started. . The timing of this T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specifying command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 106th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues, and the image data j (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is drawn in the first frame buffer. is started, the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variation effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Become.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 107th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, dynamic effect image, various patterns) to the second frame buffer. image, various icon images, etc.) is started, the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variation effect display screen j (red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 108th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data l (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, and the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is displayed. Display on the device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen k (red character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the third generated notification sound in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , compared to the case where the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generated notification sound are started with a lag in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, while the output of the third generated notification sound was started in accordance with (synchronized with) the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the red character icon was erased and the third generated notification sound was output. Since this is performed at a frame update timing different from that of stopping the output, the output of the third generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the red character icon, and the interest in the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Production example of character action change pattern 01)
FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon (character effect change pattern 01) during the variable effect.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), in a state in which the first pending icon and the second pending icon are not displayed, that is, in a state in which no pending memory is stored, the production pattern 70a is variably displayed. A normal variation effect is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 42B, after the character C1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. A performance to fly towards is performed.

Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, the display mode of the icon TH changes from the CD icon to the red character icon as shown in FIG. is output for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(a), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stop-displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a which has been variably displayed, the center variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is variably displayed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 43(b), an effect is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, when it develops into SP reach, the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(c), a combination ( Here, "222") is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(d), the effect pattern 70a returns from reduced display to its original size and is stopped and displayed in the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart of pattern action change pattern 01)
44 and 45 show various timings when the symbol effect change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the red character icon. It is a timing chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variable performance (timing of starting the variable performance), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the performance symbol 70a is performed. . At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 299th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the first pending icon to a red character icon, but no change pattern or the like is displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 , the output of the third generated notification sound does not start either.

Also, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, transition symbol images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and is rendered to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been displayed on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing of the symbol temporary stop period during which the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, the image data e (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, transition symbol images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the first frame buffer, and is being drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data d on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen d (variation pattern display) is displayed on the image display device. No output is started.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 301st frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data f (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the second frame buffer, and has been drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen e (changing pattern display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 302nd frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data g (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, transition symbol images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the first frame buffer, and is being drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (variation pattern display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 330th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data h (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, transition symbol images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the first frame buffer, and is being drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data g on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (changing pattern display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 331st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the second frame buffer, and has been drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data h on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen h (changing pattern & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third occurrence is notified from the voice output device 9. Sound output starts. The timing of this T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specifying command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 345th frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, stop effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image that was drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data i on the image display device is started, and the image display device displays the temporary stop effect display screen i (changing pattern & red character icon display). output continues.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 346th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, stop effect image, various patterns) to the second frame buffer. image, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) is started, the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the temporary stop effect display screen is displayed on the image display device. j (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 347th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data l (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, and the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is displayed. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the temporary stop effect display screen k (changing pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the third generated notification sound in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , compared to the case where the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generated notification sound are started with a lag in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, while the output of the third generated notification sound was started in accordance with (synchronized with) the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the red character icon was erased and the third generated notification sound was output. Since this is performed at a frame update timing different from that of stopping the output, the output of the third generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the red character icon, and the interest in the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Production example of pattern action change pattern 01)
FIG. 46 and FIG. 47 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the suspended icon is changed to a red character icon (symbol action change pattern 01) while the effect symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped).

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in a state in which the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, the normal fluctuation for variably displaying the production pattern 70a A performance is running.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46(b), "2" is displayed in the left variable display area, "3" is displayed in the right variable display area, and "change" effect pattern 70a is stopped in the central variable display area (temporary display). (stopped display), an effect like a lightning bolt appears from the changing pattern stopped (temporarily stopped) in the central variable display area toward the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1, When hit, the display mode of the first pending icon H11 changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the third generated notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(c), the effect symbol 70a starts to be variably displayed, and the first pending icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(a), the production pattern 70a of "2" is stop-displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a which has been variably displayed, and the center fluctuation display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is variably displayed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 47(b), an effect is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, when it develops into SP reach, the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting a big win, and the combination ( Here, "222") is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47(d), the effect pattern 70a returns from reduced display to its original size, and is stopped and displayed in the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the production control unit 130m executes the change production at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command (starting entrance winning designation command or variation pattern designation command), Since the effect control unit 130m may execute the change effect at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the increase in variations of the change effect makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start-up winning designation command, the icon change effect determines the final display mode and scenario, but the method is not limited to this. . For example, it may be determined whether or not to change the display mode each time it becomes possible to change the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon). In addition, when the effect control unit 130m receives the starting entrance winning designation command, only the final display mode is determined, and how it changes depends on the timing at which the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon) can be changed. may be determined each time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are four display modes of the icons (the relevant icon and the pending icon): a CD icon as a normal icon, and a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon as special icons. Although there are types, the number is not limited to four types, and may be more or less.

For example, a special icon (blinking CD icon) may be provided that suggests that the likelihood of winning a big win is lower than that of the blue character icon and that it may change to a special icon. When such a special icon is provided, since the expectation of winning the jackpot is lower than that of the blue character icon, the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the pattern effect change pattern 01 (after receiving the variation pattern designation command It is desirable not to change to a special icon in a change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing). By doing so, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) are easily changed to a display mode with a high expectation of winning the jackpot. Since the change to a special icon does not occur in the change effect that occurs in the game), it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed, increase the variation of the icon display mode, and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Also, in addition to the four types of the present embodiment, the special icon and the green character icon may be provided. In this case, the jackpot winning expectation for the icon (the icon, the pending icon) is in the order of (CD icon <) blinking CD icon <blue character icon <green character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon It should be made higher.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the character action change pattern 01 and the symbol action change pattern 01, whenever the character C1 or the change pattern is displayed, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon) is always changed. However, there may be a case where the character C1 and the changing pattern are displayed but are not changed (so-called fake effect). When such a fake effect is provided, the fake effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command). has a higher execution ratio than the change effect at the time of winning and the fake effect for the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command), or normal change pattern 02, character action change It is desirable to be able to execute only the ghost effect for the pattern 01 and the pattern effect change pattern 01 (a change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed multiple times during one variation effect, but may be executed multiple times. In this case, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command) have only one timing during the change effect, so the normal change The pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect occurring at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) may be executed multiple times. By doing so, there is a possibility that the display mode of the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon) may change a plurality of times in one variable effect, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect (change effect at the time of winning and normal change pattern 01) that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command is determined by a predetermined command (starting win designation Although the frame update timing is set to be two frames after the number of frames in which the command or variation pattern specification command) is received, it is not limited to two frames later. It can be after the frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol effect change pattern 01 was not provided as the icon change pattern, but it may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, when "normal change pattern 01" is executed, the change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the change pattern designation command, but the timing is not limited to this timing. You may make it perform a change production|presentation in the frame update timing according to reception of a design memory designation|designated command and the production|presentation design designation|designated command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when executing "normal change pattern 02", "character action change pattern 01", and "symbol action change pattern 01", at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command Although the change effect is executed, the change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command, without being limited to this timing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon) changes, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect for informing that the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon) has changed. However, it is not limited to such effects, and in addition to outputting an icon generation (change) notification sound, the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 can be used to display the changed icon (the icon, the pending icon). The lamp may be made to emit light in the same color as the color of the display mode of the icon). In this case, similar to the output of the icon occurrence (change) notification sound, at the frame update timing when the changed icon (the icon, the pending icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) At the same time (synchronously), light emission of the lamps of the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 may be started. Alternatively, the processing may be terminated in accordance with (synchronization with) the frame update timing for erasing the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the pending icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but are displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). good too.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted depending on the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted depending on the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command) can be executed. However, the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the pattern effect change pattern 01 (change effect occurring at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) may be made unexecutable. By doing so, the first specific game state and the second specific game state are set to have a short change time, so that the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the , By limiting the execution of the pattern action change pattern 01 (variation effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command), the game characteristics of the first specific game state and the second specific game state are improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the game without spoiling it.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the suspended icon or the icon itself, but is not limited to such a change. Without changing the mode (with the CD icon remaining), a color effect indicating the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot may be displayed around the pending icon or around the icon, or around (near) the pending icon or the icon. A character indicating the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot may be displayed on the icon, or a character image suggesting an effect scheduled to be executed (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-run") may be displayed around (near) the pending icon or the icon. may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the change scenario is determined regardless of whether the big win is won or lost, but the change scenario may be determined with reference to the big win. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the final display mode of the icon, the current pending number, the hit/loss of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). .

In this way, when determining the change scenario with reference to the hit or drop of the jackpot, if you win the jackpot and change to the red character icon, the current number of reservations is "1" or "2". In the case of 3" and "4", the selection rate (%) may be set so that the change scenario in which the icon changes to the red character icon when winning is more likely to be selected.
In other words, if you have won a jackpot and change to a red character icon, the red character icon It can also be said to be the selection rate (%) at which it is difficult to select a change scenario that changes to an icon.
In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if the character icon changes to a red character because it is a loss, the change scenario is that the red character icon changes to the red character icon when the prize is won rather than the case where the jackpot is won and the red character icon changes. should be set to a selection rate (%) at which is difficult to select.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when determining the pending icon change pattern, it is determined regardless of the current pending number or the hit/loss of the jackpot. may Specifically, based on the mode of change of the pending icon in this variable effect, the current number of pending, the hit and drop of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%), one pending icon is selected from a plurality of pending icon change patterns. A change pattern may be determined.

In this way, when determining the pending icon change pattern with reference to the current pending number and the hit or loss of the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and the red character icon changes, the current pending number is "1" or " The selection rate (%) may be set so that the "normal change pattern 01" is more likely to be selected as the reserved icon change pattern when the icon change pattern is "3" or "4" than when the icon change pattern is "2".
In other words, if you win a jackpot and change to a red character icon, the pending icon change pattern is better when the current pending number is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4" can be said to be the selection rate (%) at which "normal change pattern 01" is difficult to be selected.
In addition, when the jackpot is not won, that is, when the icon changes to a red character icon due to a loss, the pending icon change pattern is "normal change pattern 01" rather than when the jackpot is won and the icon changes to a red character icon. ” is set to a selection rate (%) that makes it difficult to select.

As described above, when changing to a red character icon in the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command), the current pending number is "1". or "2", the expectation for winning the jackpot is higher than that for "3" or "2".

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
A modified example of the first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

In the modified example of the first embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 49A, a special symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is displayed in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70 . It differs from the first embodiment in that a special symbol display area for displaying the symbol TZ is provided.

Also, at the left end of the display unit of the first image display device 70, the first reserved number display area 70E for displaying the first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1), and the current number It is also different from the first embodiment in that a second reserved number display area 70F for displaying a second reserved number indicating the number of 2 special symbol reservations (U2) is provided.

Incidentally, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F corresponds to the first pending information, the first pending icon display area The first pending icon displayed in 70B and the second pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D correspond to the second pending information, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C is the execution information. corresponds to

(Concrete example when the variable production is started from the customer waiting state)
A specific example when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 38 is a timing chart when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 49(a) to (f) and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation corresponding to.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the standby time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70F, and the pending icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generated notification sound is the notification sound when the icon is generated. output is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display portion 70B1. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol pending number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variation effect (variation display of special symbols) by the normal variation pattern is started (start of customer waiting state 5th frame from ). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the non-animated decreasing display of the first reserved number, and the changing display (decreasing display) of the first reserved icon to the icon due to animation are started. be.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(c), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". At the same time, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display portion 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the output of the first generated notification sound (the 14th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the effect The reduced display of the pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame timing (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) after the change display (decrease display) of the first pending icon starts. At this timing, the changing display of the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and When the icon becomes TH, the reduction display of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 45th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 55th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the center variable display area, the right variable display Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started, and the effect pattern 70a is scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variable effect (230th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the left variable display area, The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central and right variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side, The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the central variable display area, and is lost. A combination of effect symbols 70a indicating that there is a state is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 305th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The combination "365", which is the same as the pattern 70a, is stopped and displayed. Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, one frame in which the increase display by non-animation of the reserved number and the reserved icon is the shortest. Since it ends in a period of minutes (hours), it is possible to immediately shift to a variable performance (decrease display of the pending number and change display of the pending icon) so as not to delay, and improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon is (frame Since it continues until the update timing, the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols is reduced (changed from "1" to "0"), the display of the number of reserved numbers decreased by non-animation and the change display of the reserved icon to the icon by animation are executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing of completing the display of the decrease in the pending number (frame update) is earlier than the timing of completing the change display of the pending icon to the icon (frame update), the special symbol is reserved. While directing that the numbers change, the reserved number makes it easier for the player to grasp that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, until the change display of the pending icon to the icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern is displayed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) Since the scrolling (update to the next production pattern) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable production starts after the reserved memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, instead of executing the increased display of the reserved icon with non-animation, rather than the increased display of the reserved number Animation over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) may be executed so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of starting the decreasing display of the pending number and the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (decreasing display) at the same (frame update) timing, the timing of completing the decreasing display of the pending number (frame update) is changed. Either can be started first, as long as it is faster. By doing so, the degree of freedom of display control can be improved, and the fact that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased can be grasped at an early stage, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of starting the scrolling of the production pattern (update to the next production pattern) at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed than usual), the change display of the pending icon You may make it start the scrolling of the production|presentation design (update to the next production|presentation design) at the (frame update) timing of a little before completion.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
A specific example when the number of holdings increases during the variable effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a timing chart showing an increase in the number of holdings during variable effects, and FIGS. 52(a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (c) of FIG.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect by the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "0" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E and the second reservation number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 60th frame from the start of the variable effect) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increment display of the first hold number and the increment display of the first hold icon with animation are started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display portion 70B1, and enlarged display is started. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 70th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 ends and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases, the increase display of the reserved number by non-animation and the increase display by animation of the reserved icon are executed, so that the player can know that the number of reserved special symbols has increased. It is possible to reliably recognize the game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the increase display of the pending number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the number of special symbol pending changes. While directing this, the player can easily grasp that the reserved number of special symbols has increased by the reserved number, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the variable performance, the increasing display of the reserved icon is executed for a longer period than when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the customer waiting state. Therefore, the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the pending number and the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending icon end in synchronization with the end of the increasing display of the pending icon (frame update), so special symbol pending The increase in the number can be effectively produced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the period (10 frames) related to the increased display of the suspended icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) related to the change display of the suspended icon, the start of the variable effect is indicated. It can be emphasized, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending number and the increasing display of the pending icon at the same timing (frame update), if the timing of completing the increased display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier, which may start first. By doing so, the increase in the number of reserved special symbols can be grasped at an early stage while the degree of freedom of display control is improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, instead of shortening the period of increasing display of the pending icon, the period of increasing display of the pending icon may be longer than the period of changing display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period for increasing display of the pending icon than the period for displaying the change of the pending icon to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Concrete example when the number of pending items increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 53 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 54(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) of FIG.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 5th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. It has become. Also, "2" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and a first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. state.

The timing of T1 is the timing (the 20th frame after the stop display of the effect symbol 70a) at which the variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the first reservation number, the change display by the animation of the first reservation icon to the icon, and the animation of the first reservation icon Decrease display by .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". . In addition, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 displayed in the first display portion 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second icon displayed in the second display portion 70B2 1 pending icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display portion 70B1. Furthermore, the special design TZ starts scrolling while the production design 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another production design).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first pending number is started, but since the changing display and the decreasing display of the first pending icon are being executed, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the occurrence of the icon The output of the generated notification sound, which is the notification sound of , is on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the reduction display of the production pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the first pending icon (the 40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the changing display and decreasing display of the first pending icon are ended. In addition, the animation display of the waiting first hold icon is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and As the icon TH becomes the icon TH, the first reserved icon H12 moved from the second display portion 70B2 is positioned at the center of the first display portion 70B1, and the reduction display of the production pattern 70a stops. In addition, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display section 70B2 and enlarged display is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound (beep) from the audio output device 9 is started. be.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the first generated notification sound are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display portion 70B2 and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (blink) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first pending icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 ends and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the change display of the reserved icon to the icon and the decrease display of the reserved icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed. Even before the (frame update) timing, the increasing display of the reserved number is started, so the player is notified that the reserved number of special symbols has increased even during the execution of the changing display of the reserved icon and the decreasing display. can be made to recognize, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, if the number of special symbol reservations increases during the execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound are on standby ( limit), and at the timing when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started, so the transition of the number of special symbol holds can be prevented from becoming difficult to grasp, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of outputting the notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number. good too.

In addition, at the timing when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), instead of starting the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound (the start is delayed than usual), It is also possible to start increasing the display of the pending icon and outputting the generated notification sound at a timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the changing display and the decreasing display of the pending icon. By doing so, it is possible to suppress difficulty in grasping the transition of the number of reserved special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, even if the number of reserved special symbols increases during the increasing display of the pending icon, the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound are on standby, just like during the change display or decrease display of the pending icon. On the other hand, the increasing display of the pending number is started, and at the timing when the increasing display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound can be started.

(Specific example when the number of pending increases during specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of pending games increases during the specific reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 56(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. .

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal ready-to-win effect executed before the SP ready-to-win effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Also, "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 90th frame from the start of the normal ready-to-win effect (the 430th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the center variable display area are displayed on the screen. Move to the upper left and start zooming out.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the development effect is started (the 445th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP reach effect continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(b), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and The effect pattern 70a being scrolled is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen and displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the development effect is started (the 460th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, while the development effect is finished, the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a in the left, middle, right variable display area is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and is displayed at the center of the screen. A confrontation production is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, while leaving the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C, the suspended icon (here, only the first pending icon) is hidden together with the pending icon display area. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ is the same "7" symbol as the production symbol 70a, and is in the ready-to-win state.

The timing of T5 is the timing (the 820th frame after the start of the variable effect) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the non-animated increment display of the first pending number is started, but since the SP reach effect (showdown effect) is being executed, the increment display of the first pending icon at this timing and when the icon occurs The generated notification sound, which is the notification sound, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(d), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the final production of the confrontation production (decision production for informing whether or not it is a big win) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decision effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(e), in the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, and an effect pattern 70a displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is displayed. ("777") that indicates a big hit, temporarily stop (become in a swaying state).

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (showdown effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the non-animated return display and increase display of the first pending icon are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that has been displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen, and is temporarily stopped (shaking state). become). Also, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed in the normal size on the second display portion 70B2.

Finally, the performance symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the performance symbol 70a, "777". Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), even before the timing of the end of this specific effect (frame update), the number of reserved numbers Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the reserved icon is put on standby (restricted), and the specific effect is completed (reduced display At the timing when the losing performance pattern or the jackpot performance pattern is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), the increase display of the reserved icon is started, so it is possible to prevent the transition of the special pattern reserved number from becoming difficult to grasp, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the increase display of the pending icon is performed by non-animation completed in one frame, so the timing when the number of reserved special symbols increases Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of executing the increase display of the pending icon and the timing of executing the increase display, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbol reservations increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generated notification sound. It becomes difficult for the player to misunderstand that the player has done so, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific effect (SP ready-to-win effect), the display of the increased number of reserved numbers is executed, and the execution of the increased display of the reserved icon is waited (restricted). It is preferable that the display of the increased number of pending icons be performed collectively in one frame at the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update).

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the generated notification sound is output in synchronization with the increasing display of the reserved number instead of not outputting the generated notification sound. good too.

Moreover, although the SP ready-to-reach effect was exemplified as the specific effect, the specific effect may include the SPSP ready-to-win effect, or may include the full rotation ready-to-reach effect.

(Concrete example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
With reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, a specific example when the number of pending games increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state will be described. FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing that the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. 58(a) to (f) and FIGS. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect corresponding to (i);

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the last (100th) variable effect in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(a), "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, the first pending icon display area 70B is deleted, and the second pending icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively. and the icon TH is displayed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, the number of variable performances that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "remaining 0 times") is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, a game ball is directed toward the right side area of the game area 5a. A right-hand shot image MU prompting the player to shoot is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 415th frame after the start of the variable effect) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first pending number is started, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the notification sound when the icon is generated Output of the generation notification sound is not performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the scrolling of the production pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left, middle, and right variability display areas are temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the left, middle, and right variable display areas. A combination of performance symbols 70a indicating that the game is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display is started to show the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, and "special time end" indicating the end of the specific game state and a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. The number of times of the executed jackpot game "jackpot x 1" is displayed inside. Also, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(e), on the first image display device 70, the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. Stop display is performed at the same combination "285" as the production pattern 70a. Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing (the 490th frame from the start of the variable performance) at which the last (100th) variable performance in the specific game state ends and the first variable performance in the normal game state is started. At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the second reservation number, the change display of the second reservation icon to the icon by animation, the decrease by animation of the second reservation icon The display, the non-animated return display of the first pending icon, and the non-animated increasing display of the first pending icon are initiated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(g), in the first image display device 70, the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3". At the same time, the second pending icon (CD icon) H21 displayed in the first display portion 70D1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display portion 70D2 to the fourth display portion 70D4. The second pending icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 displayed in the .

Further, the first pending icon display area is restored and the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Furthermore, the special design TZ starts scrolling while the production design 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another production design). In addition, a left-hand shot image HU is displayed on the upper left of the screen to prompt the shooting of the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame timing (the 510th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, the change display and decrease display of the second pending icon are terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(h), in the first image display device 70, the second suspended icon H21 moved from the first display section 70D1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and As the icon TH becomes the icon TH, the second reserved icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display section 70D2 to the fourth display section 70D4 are positioned at the center of the adjacent display section, and the reduced display of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame timing (the 520th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the end of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll (downward movement).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbols 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbols 70a are displayed in the central variable display area. Scrolling (downward movement) is started.

Thus, when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increased display of the first reserved icon is waited (restricted), while the increased display of the first reserved number is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of the specific performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, when the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first reservation icon occurs at the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends (frame update). is started, even if the increase display of the first reserved number executed before is overlooked, the increase of the first special pattern reserved number can be recognized, and the amusement of the game is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, when starting to increase the display of the first reserved icon at the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends, to perform the increased display of the reserved icon by non-animation completed in one frame, special symbol reservation Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of increasing the number and the timing of executing the increasing display of the pending icons, the sense of incompatibility of the player can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the special symbol at the timing when the specific game state ends due to the generated notification sound It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, until the change display of the pending icon to the icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern is displayed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) Since the scrolling (update to the next performance pattern) is started, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the performance during the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of reserved first special symbols increases during the specific game state, while executing the increased display of the reserved number, the execution of the increased display of the reserved icon is put on standby (restricted), At the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends (frame update), the increased display of the reserved icons corresponding to the increase may be collectively performed in one frame.

In addition, when the number of first special symbol reservations increases during the specific game state, instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increasing display of the reserved number.

In the present embodiment, the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal game state, but the second reserved icon display area 70D is set ( Alternatively, only the first pending icon display area 70B may be set (displayed) without displaying.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not the specific effects (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) are being executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (displayed) during execution of the specific effect. , the icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70F were set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but set on the second image display device 71 ( display), or may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. And, when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the special symbol pending number by the lighting color and lighting/blinking mode of the LED.

(Ramp/Accessories Initial Processing of Drive Control Unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150. This processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the lamp/drive control unit 150. executed.

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110 or not. If the power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing. is set to "1".

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1" in step R103. If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R105 assuming that the character object origin return processing is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is executed in step R104. , and the present accessory initial processing is terminated. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the return operation of the accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the origin position is executed, or the initial processing number is set. Processing such as setting to "2" is performed. Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "2" in step R105. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial action processing for the accessory is not executed, and the initial action processing for this time is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , terminates the initial processing of the character product. Specifically, an initial operation and initial light emission are performed to confirm whether or not the accessory operates normally, and an initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation process will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 60, the origin return processing for performing the operation of returning various accessories to the origin position, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and initial light emission of the various accessories. Operation processing is not executed at the same time. By doing so, the return operation to the origin position of each character and the initial operation and initial light emission of each character are not mixed, and the return operation, the initial operation and the initial light emission are separately confirmed. becomes possible.

Further, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 60, the origin return process is executed before the initial action process. By doing so, the various accessories are initially moved from the origin position, and it becomes possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp/drive control unit)
The return-to-origin process of the lamp/drive control section 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing origin return processing in the lamp/drive control unit 150. As shown in FIG.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the return-to-origin status of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is moved to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the driven object to be returned to the origin is selected as the first. 1 movable member 73, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

The ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R105-3. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the driving target to be returned to the origin is selected. The second movable member 74 is set, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the origin position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position. The board accessories abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that the return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-9. , the process moves to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets, in the lamp RAM 150c, return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven. , In step R105-10, clear the board accessory abnormality determination timer.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the second movable member 74 is driven. If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board accessories (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

At step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the state of returning to the origin of the frame role object (production button 17) is "0". If the frame role object processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R105-13, and if the board role process number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R105-20.

At step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-19.

At step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position, and at step R105-15, the effect button 17 is held within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return error has occurred in the production button 17, and the process is moved to step R105-17. end the return-to-origin process.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18 clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame accessory (production button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, performs the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-described initial processing number. "2" is set, and the current origin return processing is terminated.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin position at the same time (simultaneously), but are returned in a predetermined order (first movable member 74). member 73→second movable member 74) to return to the origin position. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether or not the various board accessories have returned to the origin position. In addition, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other with difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent the two movable members from applying loads to each other, so that both movable members are damaged at the same time. Inconvenience can be suppressed.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the operation of returning the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (the effect button 17) It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) execute the return operation to . By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motion of various roles, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial motion of various roles to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory to return to the origin position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the return motion of various accessories is never finished. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the various accessories are performing the returning motions even during the variable performance and the performance motions are not performed, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the operation of returning the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (the effect button 17) When both of the return operations to return to are completed, a process for shifting to the initial operation process is performed. By doing so, the return operation of various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and the return operation and initial operation of various accessories are separately confirmed. becomes possible.

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are arranged to return to their origin positions in a predetermined order (the order of the first movable member 73→the second movable member 74). You may make it start the operation|movement which returns to. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various characters to be executed next. becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp/drive control section)
Initial operation processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 .

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". When the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R107-2, and when the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2" so that the initial action of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects the board role item initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the board role item initial motion pattern. The details of the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial motion pattern of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the movement pattern.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-7. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the lamp is set in the RAM 150c The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the existing board accessory.

In step R107-9, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial action of the board accessory have been completed. If all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have not been completed, the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have been completed, step R107-10 is performed on the board accessory. The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation state of the frame role object (effect button 17) is "0". If the frame role-playing process number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame role-playing process number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-14 assuming that the initial action of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame "2" is set to the frame role product processing number assuming that the initial action of the role product is not performed, and the process is shifted to step R107-17.

At step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame role-playing object initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-playing object. The details of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

At step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role item (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the frame role initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power ON command.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "0", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role-playing product.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-17. If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is moved to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", in step R107-18, the lamp is set in the RAM 150c. The initial motion of the frame role object is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the frame role object.

At step R107-19, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial motion of the frame role-thing has been completed. If the initial action of the frame role has not been completed in all steps, the process is shifted to step R107-21, and if the initial action of the frame role has been completed in all steps, in step R107-20, the frame role The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "1", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the frame role-playing.

In step R107-21, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, this initial operation process is terminated.

The ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the initial processing number described above in step R107-23, and ends this initial operation processing. .

Thus, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 62, the initial action of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are performed. They can be executed simultaneously (simultaneously). By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial actions of various roles, and to prevent obstruction of performance actions of various roles during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board accessories, the first movable member 73 and The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being completely broken down or damaged by forcibly initializing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 constituting the frame accessory, the initial operation of the production button 17 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as complete failure or breakage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which the return abnormality is occurring.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, even if the initial operation of the board role object in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame role object in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed, and the return abnormality is performed. Even if the initial action of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial action of the board accessory in which the recovery abnormality has not occurred is executed. By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the action of the accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 62, both the initial action of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed. The initial operation process is terminated when the By doing so, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory performs the initial action, the other performs the effect action, and it is unclear whether it is the initial action or the effect action. will no longer occur.

(Board accessories initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

Types of commands at power ON, presence/absence of recovery abnormality information, and initial operation patterns to be selected are associated with the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. The number of steps is described.

The initial operation pattern includes patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01-03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns 04 to 06 that are determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 have no return abnormality, and the first movable member 73 moves in the order of small descent→return to origin→large descent→return to origin. , the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→return to origin, and during that period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (light up) in blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and the first movable member 73 does not operate, and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→origin return, During that period, the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent→origin return→large descent→origin return, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and the first movable member LED lights (lights up) in blue and white during that period.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue. Same as pattern 01.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member LED does not light up in blue.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off. It is the same as initial operation pattern 01 or initial operation pattern 04 .
"Initial operation pattern 08" is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 or the initial operation pattern 05 except that it is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality and the second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is the same as the initial operation pattern 03 or the initial operation pattern 06 except that it is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality and the first movable member 73 is turned off.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described. This is because the member LED blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

In addition, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described. This is because the member LED blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

A first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The first movable member and the second movable member have the same operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) in the initial operation. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory is the same at least in each process, and the operation time in each process may be the same, or the operation time in each process may be the same. can be different.

Further, the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

Further, when the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is to be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. An operation not included in the initial operation at power restoration may be performed in the initial operation at power recovery, or an operation not included in the initial operation at power recovery may be performed in the initial operation at power on. In this way, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

A second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the board accessory (first movable member 73, second The difference is that the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

A third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Although they are the same, they are different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

It should be noted that the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the customer waiting state is restored, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. However, on the contrary, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is made different, while the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different. The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Also, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED are made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the state is restored to the customer waiting state. good too. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

A fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply to restore the customer waiting state, the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power supply is restored during the jackpot game. The member LED and the second movable member LED may be lit in the same light emission manner as when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

A sixth characteristic of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. If the movable member 74 has no return abnormality, the second movable member 74 is initialized without performing the initial movement of the first movable member 73, and if the first movable member 73 has no return abnormality, the second movable member The point is that when there is a return abnormality in 74, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation according to the presence or absence of the recovery abnormality.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The type of power-on command and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described as a reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the production button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin → intermittent vibration, and during that period, the production button LED Lights up (lights up) in order of red → green → blue.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power supply restoration designation command indicating that it is in the state of waiting for customers is received, and the production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, During that period, the production button lights up (lights up) in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, The production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and the production button LED is turned off during that period.

It should be noted that the continuous vibration time (2 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2 seconds) of the production button 17 are executed by operating the production button 17 during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable production. The time during which the performance button 17 vibrates during the operation performance (1 second vibrates in the case of the valid period for the big win notice to expect the big win, and 5 seconds in the valid period for the decision performance to notify whether or not the big win will occur). Second vibration) is different time.

A first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. (Production button 17) differs in the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes possible.

As a second feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on performs an action that is not the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that it is designed to By doing so, it is easier to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes possible.

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the initial operation of the frame accessory (production button 17) is performed when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. is different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

As a fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols, or at the time of power restoration during the jackpot game, the production button LED is turned off, but it is the same as at the time of power restoration in which the production button LED is restored to the customer waiting state. You may make it light up in a light emission mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is the number of luminous colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on, and the luminous color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. One point is that the numbers are different. By doing so, it is easier to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes possible.

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, the opposite may be done.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it contains an emission color that is not found in By doing so, it is easier to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes possible.

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power restoration may include a emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power-on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable effect. This is different from the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the button 17. - 特許庁By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the vibration is the initial operation of the effect button 17 .

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial action of the effect button 17 where the detection of is performed. By doing so, the confirmation of the operation of the performance button 17 and the confirmation of the operation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for confirmation of the operation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T8, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At the timing of T9, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T10, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Operation processing is started, and initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display area 70B The first pending icon is displayed, the sub-first pending indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Then, the second movable member 74 starts its return operation. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display area 70B The first pending icon is displayed, the sub-first pending indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the effect button 17 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red ( (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is completed at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white lighting). When the time elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the sound becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process has been described. In the case of power-on, after the initial screen is displayed, the effect control board 130 receives the setting change designation command, so that the setting change screen is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is received by the effect control board 130. By doing so, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return action and initial action of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Operation processing is started, and initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Then, the second movable member 74 starts its return operation. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red ( (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is completed at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished, and the image display device displays a return-in-progress screen containing the characters "Please restart the game." , the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 3, second number of reservations = 0) as a command at power ON, the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device, so the first number of reservations A state in which no pending number is displayed in the display area 70E or the second pending number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the first sub-suspension display 83 has a display mode indicating "3", and the second sub-suspension display 84 has a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T5, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T7, the second When the initial motion of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the special symbol determination command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device stops displaying (still display) is displayed (same as the second standby screen), and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound "Don♪".

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "2". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "2".

In addition, when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and there is no pending memory, "0" is displayed on the first sub-holding display 83 at the timing of T2, and the timing of T9. The flow of the basic operation from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 is the same, except that the variable effect is not started by receiving the customer waiting state designation command in .

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

If the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case, in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "Reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It will be in a control state in which it is possible to execute the production.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the performance corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. Further, the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ). After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

Although the first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

If the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which the power supply (only the main power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line There is a third case where the connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., but the first case will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as the initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "Reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which it is possible to execute the production.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed, and a power restoration specifying command for customer waiting is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started, and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. Also, the audio output device 9 is in a silent state.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

Although the second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power restoration designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the second standby screen.

In addition, although the voice output device 9 was set to be in a silent state when the power restoration designation command was received, a notification sound (alert, etc.) is output to indicate (make it possible to grasp) that the power has been turned on. You may do so. In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

(Concrete example when the command at power-on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power ON command cannot be received normally, the effect control board 130 is supplied with power, but the main control board 110 is not supplied with power. There are a second case in which the command communication line to the substrate 130 is disconnected, and a third case in which the connector of the command communication line is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state). Case 3 will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "reading" is displayed.

At the timing of T2, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, the special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number, and , second pending number=0), the image display device maintains the state in which the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when receiving the first special symbol memory designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the state where the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T4, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and , The second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the pending icon or the icon change, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 77 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of resuming after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" production pattern 70a and a special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device , the standby screen in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed. , Sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure The hold indicator 86) also maintains its display contents.

Even if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect), the customer waiting state designation command When the demonstration standby time elapses after the reception or after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration, the customer-waiting demonstration is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays the power supply instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen. The first standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). It is clear." is output.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) Timing of T4 even when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as being executed. The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is a variable effect screen (losing variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen ), the power supply to the main control board 110 during the customer waiting state is stopped and then restarted. 17), the return operation and the initialization operation are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the like.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

(Concrete example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 78 shows that only power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case of resuming after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case will be described where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" production pattern 70a and a special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays sub-information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

It should be noted that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect, or When the demonstration standby time elapses (after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the image display device displays the A second standby screen is displayed in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

(Concrete example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 79 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during the power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, during the execution of the variable production, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including characters "Please restart the game." The audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84, Sub normal figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub normal figure reservation indicator 86) maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable Initial operation of member 74 is initiated.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, in the image display device, the stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed). is displayed, and the stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9. Also, "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this variable performance is a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special symbol determination command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, on the image display device, a confirmation screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a such as "777", which is a big hit effect symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the first sub-variation display 81 is displayed. Then, it becomes a jackpot display mode indicating that it is a jackpot.

At the timing of T11, when receiving a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED will be in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. By adopting a mode, it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has passed before receiving the special symbol determination command, the temporary stop display or the stop display of the performance symbol 70a is not performed, The variable display on the first sub-variable display and the second sub-variable display will not end either.

(Concrete example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 80 shows that the power to the main control board 110 is being supplied during the execution of the jackpot effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is executed during the execution of the jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command. A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the image display device displays the jackpot effect (round effect) screen, and the right-hand hit is displayed on the upper right of the screen. A right-handed display image MG is displayed, and a jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is stopped (still displayed) at the bottom right of the screen. In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for the middle of the jackpot transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the origin of the effect button 17 A return motion to the position is initiated.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a big win including characters "Please restart the game (during the big win)". While the return-in-progress screen for intermediate use is displayed and the audio output device 9 is silent, the sub information display device 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, Sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure holding display 86) maintains the display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the same during-return screen as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 79 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable Initial operation of member 74 is initiated.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives a round designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives a round designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead. , a normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

Note that when the effect control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is being displayed, the normal ending effect screen is displayed. will be displayed.

Also, when a round designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot performance screen, the special jackpot performance screen is displayed until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command. may be continued, or a special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Also, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED go into the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are extinguished or set to a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

In FIGS. 77 to 80, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the game control state is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of production patterns 70a are the first combination. When the first initial effect pattern ("135") is displayed and the game control state is restored, the second initial effect pattern (" 753”) is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting resumption of the power supply is performed before displaying the effect symbol 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and during the variable display of special symbols and without / with hold memory Restoration The display mode of the specific display (initial screen+recovery screen display) to be displayed later on the image display device is made different. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D), and sub pending display (sub first pending display It is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories on each of the device 83 and the second sub-holding display 84), and the power supply stopped in the state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, while the image display device is performing a specific display (recovery screen display) that suggests restarting the power supply, the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area, but the hold display is executed in the sub hold display. It is possible. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the interest in the game is prevented from decreasing. can be suppressed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped (still displayed). By doing so, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the display control when restoring the game control state after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load involved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the sub-variation display device (first sub-variation display device 81, second sub-variation display device 82) restarts the supply of power that was stopped during the variation effect. When the control state of the game is restored by doing, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during recovery is displayed), the variable display ( flashing display) is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (displaying the screen during recovery) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, for the sub-suspension displays (the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84), the return screen is displayed on the image display device. When it is (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received), the display mode shows the number of reservations. By doing so, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82) performs a variable display (blinking display) while the recovery screen is being displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) may display the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as in the case, that is, at the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing when the initial screen ends), the return operation of various roles is performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the return operation of various roles, and to reduce the processing load of the return operations of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (the first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light-emitting portions of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, the effect button LED) are turned off. ing. By doing so, it is possible to distinguish from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the recovery motion is being performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, anomaly notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the display is continued until the next variable effect is started. The anomaly notification continues. By doing so, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device. From the timing after (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the production pattern 70a is displayed), the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) However, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbols is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the production symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (display of the screen during recovery middle) to perform the initial actions of various roles. By doing so, it is possible to perform initial actions of various roles at appropriate timing according to the state when power supply occurs.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the board components (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) are turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and the initialization of the main RAM 110c is performed. In the case of power supply restoration without accompanying, when the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device (during the fluctuation display of the special symbol and before the display of the production symbol 70a), the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83 , and the second sub-holding display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of holdings, and then the initial operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial action of the board role after the player has grasped the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, regarding the frame role (effect button 17), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, , When the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the production symbol 70a), the sub-suspension display device (sub-first suspension display device 83, sub-second suspension display device 84 ) becomes a display mode indicating the number of pending, the initial operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial action of the frame role after the player has grasped the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as when the performance design 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the performance design 70a is displayed) to the initial stage of various roles It is designed to work. By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that the variable effect being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is finished, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the initial screen is simply displayed to restore various characters. Action, initial action, and initial light emission are not executed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality in which the power-on command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, a winning sound is output when a special symbol storage specification command is received from the main control board 110 based on the winning of the game ball into the starting port. It is designed to By doing so, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When the control board 130 receives a variable start command from the main control board 110 while the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect corresponding to the command, the variable effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. there is By doing so, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When a variable start command is received from the main control board 110 when the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, the variable effect is performed without executing the return action or the initial action of various characters. is set to run. By doing so, it is possible to execute the production using various accessories without being hindered by the return operation and the initial operation during the execution of the variable production.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the production control board 130, which is in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) has been completed, responds to the command. Even during the control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return action of various characters and the initial action (including initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the production control board 130 is already in the process of changing production after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed, the main control board 110 If a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting only the power supply to , the return operation of various roles and the initial operation ( including initial light emission). By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, it is possible for the effect control board 130 to execute the effect according to the command, such as during the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It's like By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 responds to the command during the jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state in which it is possible to execute the effect shown above, when the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110 , the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the reset operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are not executed, but the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9. You can also just output the .

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the production control board 130, which is in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) has been completed, responds to the command. Even during a control state in which it is possible to execute a corresponding effect, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It's like By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended or during the jackpot game, the main control board When the power supply to 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed, and the first standby screen is displayed. ing. By doing this, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the production control board 130 is already in the process of changing production after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the screen during recovery is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the performance control board 130 is already in response to the command, such as during the jackpot performance after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the initial screen is not displayed, and the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot is displayed. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 executes the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect or during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state in which the power supply is possible, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, production control Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 continues, the display screen up to that point can be displayed continuously. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, production control Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 is continued and then the power supply is restarted, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, and to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

(Modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
In FIG. 81, only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is performed during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" effect symbol 70a and a second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device , the standby screen is displayed in a state in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed).

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub Information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display device 86) also maintains the displayed content.

In addition, even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the fluctuation effect, or (after the end of the customer waiting demonstration), the customer waiting demonstration is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished. do.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the initial pattern "135" when the power is turned on. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 issues an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". A sound is output.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demo production after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and during the execution of the fluctuation production (losing fluctuation production, jackpot fluctuation production) and the jackpot Even if only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 stops and then resumes during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is changed. The example shown in FIG. 77 except that it is a customer waiting demo effect screen, a variable effect screen (losing variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen), or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen). is basically the same as

(Modification 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 82 shows that only power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process have been completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned off during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. A description will be given of a case where the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply is still continuing.

At the timing of T1, if there is already a waiting state for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device shows the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. A second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays sub-information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

In addition, even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the fluctuation effect, or (after the end of the customer waiting demonstration), the customer waiting demonstration is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the initial pattern "753" at the time of power restoration. , and the second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demo production after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and during the execution of the fluctuation production (losing fluctuation production, jackpot fluctuation production) and the jackpot Even when the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is changed. 78 to 80 except that it is a customer waiting demo production screen, a fluctuation production screen (losing fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), or a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). is basically the same as the example above.

In FIGS. 81 and 82, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the standby screen on which the production pattern 70a is displayed is different from the standby screen. It is designed to switch to the initial screen. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed while the initial screen is being displayed. , and the production button LED is turned off. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, instead of starting the initial action of various characters from the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen, the various characters start at the timing when the initial screen switches to the initial screen, or between the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen. may be started.

In addition, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen is switched to the initial screen when the power ON command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received. You may make it switch to a screen. In this case, the initial action of each character may be started at the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen, or at the timing before the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen. At the switching timing, the initial actions of various roles may be started.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial actions of various characters may be started at the timing of switching from the non-display state to the initial screen, or at the timing from the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. At the timing of switching to , the initial actions of various roles may be started.

(Modified example in the case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a modification in which the second movable member 74 returns abnormally after power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify that the return abnormality has occurred. (Abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. The initial operation process ends without executing the operation.

At the timing of T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, the game ball enters the first start port 45 When receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display area 70B The first pending icon is displayed, the sub-first pending indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display device 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED The LED and effect button LED are lit during variation, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

Even if the first movable member 73 has a restoration abnormality when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the restoration abnormality. , the first movable member 73, and the second movable member 74 are completed without executing the initial movement.

Further, even when the power supply is restored, if there is a restoration abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED inform the occurrence of the restoration abnormality. In order to do so, the red blinking (abnormality notification mode) is performed, and the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 .

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, not only the movable member with the return abnormality but also the return abnormality occurs. The initial operation is not executed for any movable member that does not have one. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable member (particularly, the movable member in which the return abnormality does not occur) from becoming inoperable during the execution of the game (fluctuation effect, jackpot game), thereby reducing the enjoyment of the game. can be prevented.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flashes in red to notify recovery failure. By doing so, it is possible to easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the movable member, compared to the case where only the movable member LED provided for one of the movable members having the return abnormality is blinking in red.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member The effect button 17 that has no danger of colliding with the member 74 is designed to perform an initial action. By doing so, the operation of the effect button 17 can be confirmed, and an abnormality of the effect button 17 can be grasped.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, even if there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect button LED provided in the effect button 17 is restored. Initial light emission is performed instead of red flashing for announcing an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the effect button 17 has not returned abnormally.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial action process may be terminated without executing the initial action for the presentation button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the initial action process may be ended without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(An example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect)
FIGS. 84 and 85 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 84(a), when the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, "728 ” is stop-displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the portion 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a red character icon to start the icon change effect, and accordingly, the winning entrance lamp NR is extinguished to flash red. By changing to the state where the lamp change effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84(c), while the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a which has been variably displayed, the central variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 84(d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased together with the pending icon.

After that, when the SPSP ready-to-win game develops, as shown in FIG. 84(e), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C displaying the icon is erased together with the icon. At this time, the prize-winning lamp NR is not turned off as the icon is erased, and the lamp change effect of the prize-winning lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the prize winning opening lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 84(f).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 85(g), the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "Reading", but the winning entrance lamp NR is turned off. maintained.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. is displayed over the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect (including the execution period of the promotion effect for whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect pattern is promoted to the jackpot effect pattern of higher value for the player). However, here too, the win-win lamp NR remains turned off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect that becomes a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. A stop screen (second standby screen) in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed without performing fluctuation), To end a variable performance without resuming a lamp change performance.

At this time, the same CD icon as before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the rectangular By displaying the area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85(j), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started and displayed on the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2. A first pending icon (CD icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG. The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "777" that suggests the type of the current jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing fluctuation/swing display) ("3" that formed the reach state before power off) ↓ A combination of performance symbols different from the reach combination by the performance symbols of 3”), and a stop screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the lamp change effect is resumed at the winning entrance lamp NR. The variable production ends without doing.

In addition to the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variable performances (variation performance in which normal variation is performed, variable performance in which shortened variation is performed, variable performance in which normal reach performance is performed, SP reach performance is executed), when the power supply that was stopped during the execution is resumed and the execution period of the effect ends, the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation/swing display) of the effect symbol 70a is not performed and " 753", or a combination of the same production pattern as the ready-to-win combination by the production pattern that formed the ready-to-win state before the power was cut off, or a combination of different production patterns, which is a stop display (static display). will be

Also, with regard to the special symbol TZ, whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, whether the state after that is the normal game state or the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) Regardless of whether or not there is a special symbol TZ, the same display mode (shape, design) will be stop-displayed (stationary display) with numbers that are in the same combination as the effect symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 85(l), information indicating the type of the jackpot game (“MAX jackpot” indicating that it is the first jackpot game) is displayed on the image display device. An opening effect is started, and the first reserved icon display area 70B, the second reserved icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

In addition, while the initial screen and/or the returning screen are displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot) ) to turn on the winning entrance lamp NR.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, after the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shake fluctuation), the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable production that is stopped and displayed is resumed. After the game control state is restored, the special symbol fluctuation time has passed and the special symbol confirmation command (if the special symbol confirmation command is missed and the customer waiting state is entered after that, the customer waiting state is specified) command) is received, the effect pattern 70a is stop-displayed (stationary display) without being temporarily stopped (shaking fluctuation/swing display). By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (still displayed) after the power supply stopped during execution of the loss variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When it is done, the combination of the production design which is the initial design at the time of power restoration is stopped (still displayed) instead of the normal losing production design. By doing so, there is no need to perform complicated processing such as determining the stop display (stationary display) effect pattern by lottery, and the power supply is restored by restoring the control state of the game. It is possible to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time of stop has ended.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the production pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the big hit variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When there is, the combination of the jackpot production pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed). By doing so, it is possible to grasp that the game control state is restored and the power supply is restored, and that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped was the jackpot variable performance. Become.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, after the control state of the game is restored, when the combination of the jackpot production pattern is stopped and displayed (still display), the reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (stationary display) a combination of big hit production patterns different from the reach combination by the production pattern that was used. By doing so, the player does not have to be conscious of the jackpot effect pattern which was scheduled to be displayed stopped before the power supply is stopped, and the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted can be reduced.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the execution period of the promotion production described above is included in the variable production executed when the power supply is stopped, the power supply is restarted and the control is performed. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed) without executing the promotion effect. By doing so, no useless performance is performed until the performance pattern is stopped (still displayed), so that the variation performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped was the big hit variation performance. can be grasped immediately by the player.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the losing variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and when the jackpot fluctuation production is executed, it is stopped. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after the power supply is restarted is the same as when the power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored. By doing so, simple display control can be performed without being conscious of whether the losing variation effect is being executed or the big win variation effect is being executed, and the display after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load related to control.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the special symbols TZ are displayed in the same manner as before the power supply is stopped after the power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. Then, the numbers that are the same combination as the production pattern 70a are stop-displayed (still-displayed). By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that the variation performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped has ended.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, when the power supply that was stopped during the display of the icon is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is finished, and then the next operation is performed. Until the variable effect (scrolling of the effect pattern 70a) is started, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is changed to a background image or the like. The effect image is secured in a displayable state, but the icon is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the stopped power supply is resumed while the pending icon is displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is finished, and then the next operation is performed. Until the variable effect starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the suspended icon display area, so that the suspended icon display space (display area) can display the effect image such as the background image. It is now reserved and has a pending icon. By doing so, even when the power supply is stopped, it is possible to grasp that the suspended variable effect is not extinguished, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. becomes.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the variation production corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production (the lighting color (blue, red , Rainbow) When the stopped power supply is resumed during the storage of the special figure determination information to be changed to the rainbow) and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR is hit big without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (extinguishing or white lighting) is set so as not to suggest the degree of winning expectation. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not being executed. It becomes possible.

After the end of the execution period of the big hit variation effect, the stop screen in which the big win effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped is displayed. A second standby screen may be displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed).

Also, after the execution period of the big hit variation performance is over, the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stop-displayed is displayed, but the stop screen is not displayed and the jackpot performance pattern 70a is displayed. You may start the opening effect of the jackpot game in which is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed in the opening effect, a jackpot special pattern TZ of "777" may be displayed, or a special pattern of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, may be displayed. TZ may be displayed.

Further, after the execution period of the loss variation performance is over, the performance symbol 70a which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration and the special symbol TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the big win variation performance is over, the big win is performed. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed.

In addition, when it is made possible to execute a specific effect of inciting whether or not the big win game is executed without displaying the ready-to-win state effect symbol 70a in the variable effect (makes people expect that the big win game is executed), the specific effect After the power supply stopped during execution of the performance is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) in the case of a loss, and in the case of a big win. You may make it stop-display (still display) the big hit production|presentation pattern 70a.

Further, when the combination of the jackpot performance symbols is stopped (still displayed) after the game control state is recovered, one of the combinations of the plurality of jackpot performance symbols corresponding to the type of the jackpot game to be executed thereafter. may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is “333” and “777”, and the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is “222” and “ 444", "666" and "888", and the combination of the jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is "111", "555" and "999".

Then, when the ready-to-win combination before the power supply is stopped is "1↓1" constituting a part of the combination of the jackpot performance symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game, the jackpot game to be executed after that is the first jackpot game. In the case of a jackpot game, one of ``333'' and ``777'' (a combination of jackpot performance symbols different from the ready-to-win combination of the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) is stopped and displayed, and then executed. When the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, any one of ``111'', ``555'' and ``999'' (a combination of jackpot performance symbols that are the same as or different from the ready-to-win combination by the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) should be stopped.

In addition, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the special symbol TZ is not stopped (still displayed) with a number that is the same combination as the production pattern 70a, but is a combination different from the production pattern 70a. You may make it stop display (still display) with a number.

Further, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, when the normal game state and the customer waiting state are displayed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed), while the power supply is stopped. When the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) and customer waiting state are after the restart and the control state is restored, stop display (stationary display) of the production pattern 70a, The special symbol TZ may be stopped (still displayed).

(An example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous notice effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect)
FIG. 86 and FIG. 87 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous notice effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the losing effect symbol 70a of "728" is stop-displayed when the player is on.

After that, when the variable performance that is the preliminary variation is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the third display portion 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display portion 70B1, and the second display portion 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the first effect of the continuous advance notice effect is started, and the first pending icon ( The final display mode of the icon (=red character icon) is changed to a blue character icon to start the pending icon change effect, and along with this, the winning entrance lamp NR changes from a state in which it is extinguished to a state in which it blinks in blue. , the lamp change effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(c), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 86(d), after the effect symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the losing effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. .

After that, when the variable production that is the preliminary fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. The displayed first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the second effect of the continuous advance notice effect is started, and the pending icon change effect and the lamp change effect are continued. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 86(f), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the winning hole lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 86(g).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. To maintain the turned-off state without resuming the change performance.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. is displayed over the execution period of the pre-variation, but the win-win lamp NR remains turned off here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the advance variation ends (the production control board 130 receives a special symbol determination command indicating a failure), as shown in FIG. A stop screen in a state in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) are displayed, and the lamp change production is changed in advance without restarting. ends.

At this time, the CD icon, which is not the blue character icon before the power supply is stopped, is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. However, by displaying the rectangular area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 1 pending icon (CD icon) is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, when a lottery for the newly executed icon change effect is won, the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a blue character icon according to the result, and the icon is displayed. A change production is started. On the other hand, since the lottery relating to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the lamp change effect is not restarted while the prize winning entrance lamp NR is kept turned off.

In addition, when a lottery relating to the alternative notice effect performed by restarting the power supply is won, the mini-character MCB is displayed on the image display device according to the result, and the mini-character MCB moves out of the frame to substitute. A preview effect is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(l), the dialogue uttered by ally A is displayed in the dialogue window displayed on the image display device, and a voice corresponding to the dialogue from the voice output device 9, "Your chance is here!" is displayed, the dialog announcement effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87(m), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and the central variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 87(n), SP reach effect is started, effect pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size at the upper left of the screen, first pending icon display area 70B, and second The pending icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 87(o), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG. "333" jackpot performance symbol 70a suggesting the type of jackpot game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (shake fluctuation), then stop-displayed, and the variable performance is completed.

In addition, while the initial screen and/or the returning screen are displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot) ) to turn on the winning entrance lamp NR.

In addition, when the special symbol determination command cannot be received during the fluctuation production (temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a), the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) production pattern 70a does not stop and display. The temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) is continued.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the continuous notice production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure stored at the time of restoration It is possible to execute an alternative notice effect different from the continuous notice effect without restarting the continuous notice effect in the variable effect corresponding to the determination information. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous advance notice performance due to the stoppage of the power supply, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the reserved icon displayed as a special icon (including the case where it has not changed until the final display mode and the case where it has changed until the final display mode) When the power supply stopped during icon display is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the suspended icon displayed as the special icon is displayed as the normal icon. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after resuming the power supply without being conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the icon change production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration In the variable effect corresponding to , the pending icon change effect is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed again. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the icon change effect due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, during the execution of the variation production corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration, even if the icon change production is executed again, The continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply was cut off is no longer executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect in accordance with the content of the current variation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the variation production corresponding to the holding icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production (the lighting color (blue, red , Rainbow) Even if the power supply stopped during the storage of the special figure determination information to be changed to the rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the lamp change effect is not restarted. The lamp NR is set to a notification mode (extinguished or lit in white) that does not suggest the degree of expectation for winning a big win. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not being executed. It becomes possible.

(Concrete example when the connection state of various detection means changes)
FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection state of various detecting means changes during the customer waiting state.

Here, the wires from the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. and

First, FIG. 88(a) will be described.
FIG. 88(a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in a state in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). .

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is half-inserted and only the first start port detection switch 45a is disconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error. , and the effect control board 130 executes the connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG containing the words "connection error detected" indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 issues an alarm and a message "connection error". A connection error notification sound is output.

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first start opening detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been released. However, the connection error notification continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Next, FIG. 88(b) will be described.
FIG. 88(b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection states of the first starting door detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in a state in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). .

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is inserted halfway and the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are disconnected, The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error, and the performance control board 130 executes magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays the characters "Magnetic Error Detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the characters "Radio Wave Error Detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the characters "Connection Error" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. An error annunciation image EG including the words "detected" is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a magnetic error annunciation sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "Magnetic error".

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first starting port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error have been cancelled, but various error reports continue until the game machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, when the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the occurrence of the connection error is not detected by the main control board 110, and the error Notification is not executed.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIG. When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a) change from the connected state to the disconnected state, an error is notified. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality (connector half-inserted, disconnection, fraudulent act), and to take prompt action.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, the specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) is non-operating. Even when the connected state returns to the connected state, the error notification of the magnetic error or the radio wave error continues until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts with respect to the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, even if the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the error notification is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of cheating is low, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

It should be noted that even when the power supply to the game machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (the starting port detection switch, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected. , During the display of the initial screen or after the end of the initial screen (at the start of display of the first standby screen or the second standby screen), various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) may be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues. The connection error notification may be canceled when the unconnected state changes to the connected state. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of fraudulent conduct is low, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the radio error notification sound associated with a radio wave error with a lower priority (importance) than a magnetic error and the connection error notification sound associated with a connection error with a lower priority (importance) than a radio error are If they occur at the same time, they are not output. However, it is also possible to output notification sounds related to the errors that have occurred in order.

In the magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification, the error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or the error notification image EG may be displayed and the error notification sound may be output. may not be output.

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Ramp/Accessories Initial Processing of Drive Control Unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control section 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control unit 150 .
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same processes as those of the role product initial process of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted, and the different processes are described.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag to be set in the lamp RAM 150c when power supply is started. If there is no power ON flag, the process proceeds to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. , the process moves to step R102B, and if the power-on command is not received, the process moves to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds, which should have completed the restoration operation and the initial operation since the power was turned on last time) has passed, the process proceeds to step R103, and the predetermined period of time has not passed. In that case, the process moves to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a executes origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing. is set to "1".

As described above, according to the modified example of the role initialization process shown in FIG. 89, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and initial operation of various roles are started. It's becoming By doing so, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether the control state of the game is initialized or whether the control state of the game is restored. It is possible to reduce the processing load associated with the operation.

Further, according to the modified example of the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. 89, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, the power-on command (power-on designation command, power supply restoration designation command), the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation are performed again. By doing so, the main control board 110 did not start up normally, and the power-on command was sent later than usual (an abnormality related to the power supply line from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 occurred. It is possible to grasp that

Note that when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, regardless of the elapsed time since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, the return operation of various characters, and , the initial operation may be performed. In this way, the player does not have to be conscious of the elapsed time since the power supply to the game machine 1 was started, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing when the power ON command is received.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to alternately turn on red and white. Then, the lighting mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during customer waiting (white light). Become. At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. . In addition, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light red and white, and the effect button LED turns red → Lights up in order of green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial motion processing is performed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74. finish.

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a command when the power is turned on, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes to alternately light red and white. , the light emission mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial action process is performed without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73. finish.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to alternately turn on red and white. do.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting). At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without changing the setting has been described. When the power is turned on, after the dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, the effect control board 130 receives the setting change designation command, so that the setting change screen is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is effected. When the substrate 130 receives the signal, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return action and initial action of various accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the production button 17) are started. . Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as a power-on time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light blue and white. At the same time, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change to light up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during customer waiting (white light). Become.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. . At this time, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white, producing a production The light emission mode of the button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial motion processing is performed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74. When the process ends, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change and light up in blue. .

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial action process is performed without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73. When the process ends, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white. 2 The light emission mode of the movable member LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white, The light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the production button LED change and light up in blue. At this time, the image display device displays a recovery-in-progress screen including characters of "Please restart the game", and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 3, second number of reservations = 0) as a command at power ON, the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device, so the first number of reservations A state in which no pending number is displayed in the display area 70E or the second pending number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode showing "3", and the second sub-suspension indicator 84 and the sub-normal figure suspension indicator 86 become a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At the timing of T7, when the special symbol determination command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device stops displaying (still display) is displayed (same as the second standby screen), and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound.

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "2". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "2".

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on.

If the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case, in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110 and power supply is started. Then, the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 is in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started, and the initial motion of the effect button 17 is started. At timing T5, when the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at T5 the initial action of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the time T6, the second movable When the initial action of the member 74 is finished, the initial action process is finished, and the effect control board 130 enters a control state in which the effect corresponding to the command can be executed.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the performance corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in red and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. After that, when the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the sound becomes silent.

Although the first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

If the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which the power supply (only the main power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line There is a third case where the connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., but the first case will be described here.

Note that the timings from T1 to T7 are the same as the timings from T1 to T7 in FIG. 99, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T7 will be described.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the effect corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 remains silent.

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and effect button LED are lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. Lights up (lights up in white).

Although the second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power restoration designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, although the audio output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when a power restoration designation command is received, an information sound (alert, etc.) indicating that the power has been turned on (to be comprehensible) is emitted for a predetermined period. You may make it output over (for example, 30 seconds). In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

In FIGS. 99 to 100, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

(Concrete example when the command at power-on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power supply restoration designation command cannot be received normally, the case where power is not supplied to the main control board 110, the case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state).

Note that the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 99, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T5 will be described.

At the timing of T5, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the first power restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the special symbol storage designation command (the first pending number and the second When the pending number=0) is received, the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the display mode of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED changes and turns off. becomes.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol memory designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to the display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and , The second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the pending icon or the icon change, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 102 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of resuming after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the returning operation of various characters and the initial operation are completed, and the image display device displays the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration. 70a and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button are displayed. The LED is lit while the customer is waiting.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first 1 fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure holding display 86) also display contents maintain.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in red and white as initial light emission, the effect button LED is lit in white as initial light emission, and the image display device is powered on. The first standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). It is clear." is output.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) Timing of T4 even when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as being executed. The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is a variable effect screen (losing variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen ), the power supply to the main control board 110 during the customer waiting state is stopped and then restarted. 17), the return operation and the initialization operation are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the like.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in various roles, as in the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

(Concrete example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
In FIG. 103, only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case of resuming after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case will be described where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, if there is already a waiting state for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device shows the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. A second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays sub-information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

It should be noted that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect, or When the demonstration standby time elapses (after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, the first movable member 73, and the effect button 17. return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). A second standby screen of status is displayed.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return motion of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return processing is performed. After the end, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. Lights up (lights up in white).

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Concrete example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 104 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process is completed (during the power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, during the execution of the variable production, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game" is displayed, and the audio output device 9 is silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub The second fluctuation display 82, the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub-normal figure suspension display 86) maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 is displayed. output a stop sound. Also, "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this variable performance is a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special symbol determination command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a such as "777", which is a jackpot effect symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the first sub-variation display 81 is displayed. Then, a big win display mode is displayed to indicate that a big win has been made, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

At the timing of T11, when receiving a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

Note that at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but may be extinguished or in a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, as in the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has passed before receiving the special symbol determination command, the temporary stop display or the stop display of the performance symbol 70a is not performed, The variable display on the first sub-variable display and the second sub-variable display will not end either.

(Concrete example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 105 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during execution of the jackpot effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is executed during the execution of the jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command. A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the big win effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the big win effect (round effect) screen is displayed on the image display device, and the big win special pattern TZ ("777") is displayed. is stopped (still displayed). In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for the middle of the jackpot transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the origin of the effect button 17 A return motion to the position is initiated.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, a during-returning screen for during-jackpot including characters of "Please restart the game (during-jackpot)" is displayed, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal A view hold indicator 86) maintains its display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the same during-return screen as in the case where the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 104 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives a round designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives a round designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead. , a normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

Note that when the effect control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is being displayed, the normal ending effect screen is displayed. will be displayed.

Also, when a round designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot performance screen, the special jackpot performance screen is displayed until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command. may be continued, or a special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Also, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are extinguished or in a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, as in the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

In FIGS. 102 to 105, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the game control state is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of production patterns 70a are the first combination. When the first initial effect pattern ("135") is displayed and the game control state is restored, the second initial effect pattern (" 753”) is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting resumption of the power supply is performed before displaying the effect symbol 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and during the variable display of special symbols and without / with hold memory Restoration The display mode of the specific display (initial screen+recovery screen display) to be displayed later on the image display device is made different. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D), and sub pending display (sub first pending display It is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories on each of the device 83 and the second sub-holding display 84), and the power supply stopped in the state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, while the image display device is performing a specific display (recovery screen display) that suggests restarting the power supply, the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area, but the hold display is executed in the sub hold display. It is possible. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the interest in the game is prevented from decreasing. can be suppressed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped (still displayed). By doing so, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the display control when restoring the game control state after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load involved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, for the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82), the power supply that was stopped during the variation effect is resumed. When the control state of the game is restored by doing, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during recovery is displayed), the variable display ( flashing display) is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (displaying the screen during recovery) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, for the sub-suspension displays (the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84), the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device. When it is (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received), the display mode shows the number of reservations. By doing so, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82) performs a variable display (blinking display) while the recovery screen is being displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) may display the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed), the return operation of various roles is performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the return operation of various roles, and to reduce the processing load of the return operations of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light-emitting portions of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, the effect button LED) are turned off. ing. By doing so, it is possible to distinguish from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the recovery motion is being performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, anomaly notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting part of the character having the return abnormality, the display is continued until the next variable effect is started. The anomaly notification continues. By doing so, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed), the initial actions of various roles are performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) are turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and the initialization of the main RAM 110c is performed. In the case of power restoration without accompanying, the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device It is designed to perform an initial operation before By doing so, it becomes easier to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the presentation is hindered by the initial motion of the board accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, regarding the frame role (effect button 17), when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, , The initial operation is performed before the sub-suspension display (sub-first suspension display 83, sub-second suspension display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device) It's like By doing so, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the presentation is hindered by the initial motion of the frame role. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that the variable effect being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is finished, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even if the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the recovery operation, initial operation, Then, the display of the initial screen is continued while executing the initial light emission. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality in which the power-on command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even if the display of the initial screen is continued due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), When a special symbol memory specification command is received from the main control board 110 based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port when the effect control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command, a winning sound is generated. is output. By doing so, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the effect When receiving a variation start command from the main control board 110 after the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, the variable effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. there is By doing so, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbol.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the production control board 130, which is in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even during the control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return action of various characters and the initial action (initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 is already in the process of changing effect after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130, such as during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation becomes possible to eliminate

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, it is possible for the effect control board 130 to execute the effect according to the command, such as during the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It's like By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various characters. You can just do it.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the production control board 130, which is in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even during a control state in which it is possible to execute a corresponding effect, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It's like By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

In addition, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as the returning operation of various roles and the variable effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed and the jackpot effect. Even in the state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed. The first standby screen is displayed. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 is already in the process of changing effect after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the screen during recovery is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 is already in response to the command, such as during the jackpot effect after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the initial screen is not displayed, and the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot is displayed. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 executes the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect or during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state in which the power supply is possible, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen is displayed without displaying, and when the power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, production control Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 continues, the display screen up to that point can be displayed continuously. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, production control Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 is continued and then the power supply is restarted, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, and to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

The control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command are the customer waiting state, the variable effect, and the jackpot effect. The state of waiting for a command (for example, during display of the initial screen) may also be included in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters) of "1" to "9", but may be composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters (decoration part). In this case, it is preferable to use a different character for each number, such as "1" and character A, "2" and character B, and so on. Also, in the normal game state, the production pattern 70a is displayed with numbers + characters, and in the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state), the production pattern 70a is only numbers or numbers + characters smaller than the normal game state. can be displayed with

Also, three types of production modes A to C may be provided in the normal game state, and at least one of the number design and character design of the production pattern 70a may be different for each production mode. Also, two types of production modes D to E may be provided in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, and at least one of the design of the numbers and the design of the characters of the production pattern 70a may be different for each production mode. Furthermore, two types of production modes F to G may be provided in the low-probability short-time gaming state, and at least one of the number design and character design of the production pattern 70a may be changed for each production mode.

In this case, when the power supply is stopped in any of the production modes A to C in the normal game state, and then the power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, the production mode A is always set. At the same time, after the end of the display of the initial screen or the returning screen, the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is displayed still without being oscillatingly displayed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the production mode A is always set, and the production pattern 70a corresponding to the production mode A is statically displayed without swinging after the initial screen is displayed. will be

Then, when the power supply is stopped in any of the production modes D to E in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, and then the power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, the production mode D is always performed. In addition to being set, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode D is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the production mode A is always set, and the production pattern 70a corresponding to the production mode A is statically displayed without swinging after the initial screen is displayed. will be

Furthermore, when the power supply is stopped in any of the production modes F to G in the low-probability short-time game state, and then the power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the production mode F is always performed. In addition to being set, after the display of the initial screen or the screen during recovery is completed, the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the effect mode F is not oscillatingly displayed but is still displayed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the production mode A is always set, and the production pattern 70a corresponding to the production mode A is statically displayed without swinging after the initial screen is displayed. will be

In addition, when the production pattern 70a is reduced in the SP reach production or the SPSP reach production in the normal game state, the production pattern 70a is changed to numbers only, and the production pattern 70a is temporarily displayed after the SP reach production or the SPSP reach production is completed. When the stop display (swing display) is performed, the production pattern 70a may be returned to the number+character.

In this case, the power supply is stopped during SP reach or SPSP reach in the normal game state, that is, when the effect pattern 70a is changed to only numbers, and then the power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When this is done, after the end of the display of the screen during recovery, the production pattern 70a of numbers and characters is not oscillatingly displayed but is still displayed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, after the display of the initial screen is completed, the effect symbol 70a of numbers and characters is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed.

Furthermore, the power supply is stopped during the SP reach or SPSP reach in the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state), that is, when the production pattern 70a is only a number, and then the power supply When the game is resumed and the control state of the game is recovered, the production pattern 70a with only numbers is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed after the display of the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, after the display of the initial screen is completed, the effect symbol 70a of numbers and characters is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed.

<Content 1 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed is obtained, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is established, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance becomes a special result, a special game is executed. Among such gaming machines, there is one that displays a pending image corresponding to undetermined determination information (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-33530). In addition, the gaming machine enhances the interest of the game by changing the normal pending image to the pending image of the display mode suggesting the possibility that the variable effect will result in a special result. However, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine described above in order to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and signals from the main control means In a gaming machine provided with a sub-control means (effect control unit 130m) that controls game effects based on (commands, etc.), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judgment means (main CPU 110a) for judging whether or not, and reservation means (main RAM 110c) capable of withholding the judgment right, wherein the slave control means controls a reserved image corresponding to the reserved right. Image display means (display/sound control unit 140) for displaying (holding icon) on display means (first image display device 70), and predetermined notification effect ( an effect execution means (display/sound control unit 140) for executing an icon generation (change) notification sound), and the image display means displays an image to be displayed on the display means each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. It is configured to be updated, and it is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) to change from the reserve image to a special reserve image indicating the possibility of whether or not to perform the special game, and the change effect is the A first change effect (change effect at the time of winning) executed at frame update timing in response to reception of a command (starting win prize designation command) indicating that the right has been generated transmitted from the main control means, and the main control means A second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and pattern effect change to be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from pattern 01), wherein the effect execution means starts the notification effect at the frame update timing at which the first change effect starts, and the frame update timing is different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. , the notification effect is terminated. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and signals from the main control means In a gaming machine provided with a sub-control means (effect control unit 130m) that controls game effects based on (commands, etc.), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judging means (main CPU 110a) for judging whether or not, holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of withholding the judgment right, and based on the result of the judgment, the symbol is variably displayed and then the symbol is stopped and displayed. and an image display means (display/ an audio control unit 140), an effect execution means (display/audio control unit 140) for causing the effect means (audio output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound) in the course of the game; wherein the image display means is configured to update an image displayed on the display means each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and a special It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) to change to a pending image, and the change effect is a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating that the variable display of the pattern transmitted from the main control means starts ) and a command indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means (variation pattern designation command). and a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at the frame update timing, and the effect execution means starts the first change effect. The notification effect is started at frame update timing, and the notification effect is ended at frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and signals from the main control means In a gaming machine provided with a sub-control means (effect control unit 130m) that controls game effects based on (commands, etc.), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judging means (main CPU 110a) for judging whether or not, holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of withholding the judgment right, and based on the result of the judgment, the symbol is variably displayed and then the symbol is stopped and displayed. and a variation control means (main CPU 110a) to allow the right to change, and the slave control means includes a pre-judgment pending image (holding icon) corresponding to the reserved right, and Image display means (display/sound control unit 140) for displaying on the display means (first image display device 70) a post-judgment pending image (the icon) corresponding to the right of , and effect means ( Effect execution means (display/audio control unit 140) for causing the audio output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (an icon generation (change) notification sound), and the image display means is provided with a predetermined frame update timing. It is configured to update the image displayed on the display means each time, and the pre-judgment special holding image or post-judgment showing the possibility of whether or not to perform the special game from the pre-judgment holding image or the post-judgment holding image It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) to change to a special reserved image, and the change effect is a command (variation pattern designation command) sent from the main control means when the variable display of the pattern starts ) and a command indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means (variation pattern designation command), which is predetermined after receiving and a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01) executed at a predetermined frame update timing, and the effect execution means starts the first change effect. than in the case where the notification effect is started at the frame update timing to be set, and the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and the image is changed to the pre-judgment special reservation image. It is better to change to a special hold image after the judgment , the ratio of execution of the second change effect is high. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and signals from the main control means In a gaming machine provided with a sub-control means (effect control unit 130m) that controls game effects based on (commands, etc.), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judgment means (main CPU 110a) for judging whether or not, and reservation means (main RAM 110c) capable of withholding a predetermined number of the judgment rights, and the slave control means corresponds to the reserved rights. Image display means (display/sound control unit 140) for displaying a pending image (suspended icon) on display means (first image display device 70), and predetermined notification to production means (sound output device 9) in the progress of the game and an effect executing means (display/sound control unit 140) for executing an effect (an icon generation (change) notification sound), wherein the image display means causes the display means to display at each predetermined frame update timing. It is configured to update the image, and it is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) for changing from the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of whether or not to perform the special game, and the change effect is , executed at the frame update timing according to the command (starting winning prize designation command, variation pattern designation command, special pattern storage designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the number of said reserved rights changes. Predetermined predetermined frame update after receiving the first change effect (change effect at the time of winning, normal change pattern 01) and the command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means Including a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at the timing, and the display mode of the special hold image is the first display mode (blue character icon) and a second display mode (red character icon) in which the possibility of performing the special game is higher than that of the first display mode, and the effect executing means sets the frame update timing at which the first changing effect is started. , the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and the second change effect is performed before the first change effect is executed. is executed, it is easier to change to the second display mode, and the first change When changing to the second display mode in the production, the special game when the number of the reserved rights is a second number larger than the first number than when the first number Likely to do so. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, "special pending image" and "special pending image before judgment" are those that change the shape and color of the normal pending icon, and the color that indicates the expectation of winning the jackpot around the pending icon. One that displays an effect, one that displays a character indicating the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot around (near) the pending icon, and a character image (e.g., "SP") suggesting an effect to be executed around (near) the pending icon. and "pseudo ream", etc.).

In addition, the "post-judgment special hold image" is an image that changes the shape of the normal icon, an image that changes the color, an effect that displays a color effect around the icon that indicates the expectation of winning the jackpot, A character that indicates the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is displayed around (near) the icon, and a character image that suggests an effect to be executed around (near) the icon (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-run"). ), etc.

Also, the "first display mode" includes a special icon (blinking CD icon), a blue character icon, a green character icon, and the like.
Also, the “second display mode” includes a red character icon, a rainbow character icon, and the like.

In addition, the "post-judgment pending image" and "post-judgment special pending image" are those that are displayed from the start of the variable effect to the end, those that are displayed for a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect, and the variable The specific period (SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.) during the production includes those in which the display is erased.

<Content 2 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, determination information acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition is stored as a pending memory, and based on the determination information, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the determination result is used. It is common to execute a variable production based on. In such a game machine, by performing an increase display or a decrease display of the hold image corresponding to each of the hold memories, or by displaying the execution image corresponding to the hold memory in which the variable effect is executed, There have been some that allow a player to grasp the progress of a game (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-018225). However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of reserved memories when the number of reserved memories changes.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means can execute the display of the first pending information and the second pending information. The decrease display of the first hold information (1 is subtracted) is earlier than the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second hold information (movement to the center of the next display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing that will complete the update to the pending digits) is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command etc.) from the main control means to control the game effect. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decrease in the first pending information and the second pending information in which the variable effect is started. It is possible to perform a change display that changes to the execution information (the icon), and the change display of the second hold information to the execution information (moving from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the decrement display of the first pending information (update to the pending number decremented by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which the frame is updated. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means can execute the display of the first pending information and the second pending information. when the number of the reserved memories increases, it is possible to display an increase of the first reserved information and an increased display of the second reserved information, and during the display of the decreased second reserved information, When the number increases, even before the frame update timing at which the decreasing display of the second pending information (movement to the center of the next display unit in the pending icon display area) is completed, the first pending Incremental display of information (update to pending digits incremented by one) is to be initiated. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command etc.) from the main control means to control the game effect. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the reserved memories decreases, the information display means displays the reduced first reserved information and the second reserved information whose variable display is started. A change display that changes to the execution information (the icon) can be executed, and when the number of the pending memories increases, an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information can be executed. Yes, and when the number of pending memories increases during change display of the second pending information, the decreasing display of the second pending information (moving from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. Even before the frame update timing of , the increase display of the first reservation information (update to the reservation number incremented by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means can increase the display of the first pending information and increase the display of the second pending information. Yes, when the number of the pending memories increases during the execution of the variable effect, the increase display of the second pending information (enlargement of the pending icon additionally displayed in the pending icon display area to the normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increased display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number incremented by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which . By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means to control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the variable effect execution means is capable of displaying during execution of the variable effect It is possible to execute a specific effect (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected, and the information display means displays the first pending information when the number of the pending memories increases. and an increased display of the second pending information, and when the number of the pending memories increases during execution of the specific effect, the increased display of the first pending information (1 is added update to the reserved number) is executed, but the increase display of the second reserved information is executed until a predetermined condition is established (the specific effect is completed, the losing effect pattern or the jackpot effect pattern that has been displayed in a reduced size is enlarged and displayed). It is designed not to be By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command etc.) from the main control means controls the game effect. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, A game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, wherein the sub-control means displays a variable effect according to the result of the determination. Variable effect execution means executable by display means (image display device), first reservation information (reservation number) indicating the number of the reservation memories, and second reservation information indicating the identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories ( and an information display means capable of displaying a pending icon), wherein, when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means increases display of the first pending information and increases display of the second pending information. The storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the first starting port) as a first reservation storage, and the establishment of the second acquisition condition When the determination information based on (entrance of the game ball to the second starting port) is stored as a second reservation memory, and the number of the first reservation memory increases in the specific game state, the first reservation information Increased display (updated to the reserved number with 1 added) is executed, but the increased display of the second reserved information satisfies a predetermined condition (finishing the final variation effect in the specific game state, returning to the normal game state). It will not run until By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

(Content 3 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to judge whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute the special game according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , effect control capable of performing the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means during execution of the game. means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means changes the operation mode of the initial operation (operation mode, light emission mode, etc.) are made different. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, an operating means (effect button 17) that can be operated by a player and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, and an electric power Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of supply, or restoring to the state before the stop of power supply, and the operation means after the start of power supply Effect control means (effect control board 130) that performs initial light emission and is capable of performing effect light emission of the operation means during execution of the game, wherein the effect control means initializes the control state of the game. The light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission is made different between when the control state of the game is restored and when the control state of the game is restored. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode , second movable member 74), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation and the effect light emission of the movable effect means during execution of the game. ), wherein the effect control means determines the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (the number of steps and the Although the operation mode of the operation of each step, etc.) is the same, the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means is made different. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode , second movable member 74), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing effect light emission of the movable effect means during execution of a game; The effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), and the effect control means controls when the control state of the game is initialized. and when the control state of the game is restored, at least part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the first movable effect means is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the second movable effect means is the same. are designed to be different. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine where a game can be played, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, Determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to stop the power supply Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the previous state, and variable display of a plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. and a production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by the production, wherein the plurality of production patterns include identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that allow each to be identified, and the production When the game control state is initialized, the control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means to a first combination (for example, "135"), and sets the game control state. is restored, the second combination (for example, "753") is used as the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

(Content 4 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional game machine generally initializes the control state of a game after power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs an initial operation of movable effect means after power supply is started (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the movable effect means may not be able to perform a suitable initial action.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the stop of the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the start of power supply (power supply restoration) at which the game control state is restored. In this case, the initial action is performed after the return action of the movable effect means to the first position is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the stop of the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the start of power supply (power supply restoration) at which the game control state is restored. In this case, the return operation of the movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the movable effect means returns to the first position, the initial motion is performed, but when the movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial motion is performed. The initial operation is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the stop of the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game. a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the movable effect means includes first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (second movable member 74); The effect control means is arranged so that the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position at the start of power supply (recovery of power supply) when the control state of the game is restored. , the return operation of the first movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the first movable effect means is Instead, the initial motion of the second movable effect means is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the stop of the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game. a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the movable effect means includes first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (second movable member 74); The effect control means is arranged so that the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position at the start of power supply (recovery of power supply) when the control state of the game is restored. , the return operation of the first movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the stop of the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game. a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the movable effect means includes first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (second movable member 74); The effect control means is configured such that when the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first If it is at the position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and if the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the first movable effect means is performed. , the initial motion of the second movable effect means is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the stop of the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game. A control means (rendering control board 130) is provided, and the movable rendering means includes a first movable rendering means (first movable member 73), a second position of the first movable rendering means, and a second position of itself. Including a second movable effect means (second movable member 74) that overlaps with the effect control means, the control state of the game is initialized When the power supply starts (power on), the When the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and the first movable effect means is moved to the first position. When the effect means does not return to the first position, the initial movement of the second movable effect means is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

(Content 5 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply that was stopped during the variable presentation is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and the interest in the game is reduced. There was a problem that there is a possibility to

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine where a game can be played, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, Determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to stop the power supply Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the previous state, and variation accompanied by variation display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing production is provided, and in the variable production, the production pattern that is being variably displayed is oscillatingly displayed (temporary stop display) and then statically displayed ( When the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable effect that oscillates the effect symbol is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means returns a predetermined (at the time of receiving the command for confirming the special design and at the time of receiving the command for waiting for the customer), the performance design can be statically displayed on the display means without being oscillatingly displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can be played, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening) information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game after the start of power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before stopping power supply, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of displayed production patterns, and in the variable production, a ready-to-win state is determined by a part of the production patterns. Including a ready-to-win variation effect that is formed and displayed to execute a ready-to-win effect, the effect control means, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the ready-to-win effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, at a predetermined timing ( At the time of receiving a special pattern confirmation command, at the time of receiving a customer waiting command), the combination of the production patterns different from the ready-to-win combination by the production patterns that formed and displayed the ready-to-win state can be displayed on the display means in a stationary state. . By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

(Content 6 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest in the game. There was a problem that there is

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110), initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before stopping the power supply, and determination by the determination means According to the result, a production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with a variable display of the production pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), are a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state that is the execution period of the variable performance in the state without the pending memory, and an execution period of the variable performance in the state with the pending memory. When the game control state is restored, the effect control means can perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbols on the display means. and the mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply stopped in the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored, and the power supply is stopped in the first state or the second state. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen+screen during recovery) when the power supply is resumed and the first state or the second state is restored is made different. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

(Content 7 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect on the display means when the player is not playing a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game after the start of power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before stopping power supply, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with a variable display of the displayed production pattern, and the production control means, after statically displaying the production pattern on the display means When a predetermined period of time elapses, it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) by the display means, and when the effect pattern is statically displayed after the fluctuation time of the variable effect elapses, and the control state. It is possible to change the period until the customer waiting effect is executed depending on whether the effect pattern is statically displayed after the initialization of or after the control state is restored. By doing so, the customer waiting effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Content 8 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information corresponding to determination information during execution of a variable effect on a display means (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest in the game. There was a problem that there is

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game after the start of power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and an effect displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with variable display of symbols, and the production control means, when the control state of the game is restored, displays the production on the display means. It is possible to perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the pattern, and the determination information during execution of the variable effect is displayed in a predetermined display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. It is possible to display the corresponding execution information (the icon), and when the power supply stopped during the display of the execution information is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the next from the end of the specific display Until the start of the variable display, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed), and the execution information is displayed in the predetermined display area. It is set not to display. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

(Content 9 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information, there was a gaming machine that executes a look-ahead notice effect over a plurality of fluctuation effects (for example, JP-A-2017-143904 reference). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a problem that there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply stopped during the pre-reading notice effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. there were.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. determination means (main control board 110), prior determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before determination by the determination means, and initialization of the game control state after the start of power supply. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the state before the power supply is stopped, and according to the determination result of the determination means, the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display, and the production control means performs the variable production a plurality of times based on the determination result of the prior determination means. It is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect) over a period of time, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the pre-reading notice effect is not resumed, and in the variable performance executed next to the variable performance in which the power supply is stopped, a notice performance (for example, an alternative notice performance) different from the look-ahead notice performance can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous advance notice performance due to the stoppage of the power supply, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Content 10 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed over a plurality of variable effects (for example, JP-A-2017 -143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply that was stopped during the specific effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. rice field.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. determination means (main control board 110), prior determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before determination by the determination means, and initialization of the game control state after the start of power supply. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the state before the power supply is stopped, and according to the determination result of the determination means, the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display, wherein the performance control means steps the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over a plurality of times of the variable performance. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that is explicitly suggested, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the power supply is Although the specific performance can be executed in the variable performance executed next to the stopped variable performance, it is not executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before stopping the power supply. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect in accordance with the content of the current variation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Content 11 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such game machines, there is a game machine that executes a specific effect in which the display mode of the identification information displayed corresponding to each piece of determination information for which the execution of the variable effect is not completed is changed in stages. There was (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply stopped during the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is resumed is high. There was a fear that

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. determination means (main control board 110), prior determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before determination by the determination means, and initialization of the game control state after the start of power supply. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the state before the power supply is stopped, and according to the determination result of the determination means, the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) Effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display, and the effect control means is provided with the determination information and the variable effect that the execution of the variable effect is not completed. It is possible to display identification information (the corresponding icon, pending icon) corresponding to each of the determination information that has not been started, and the special game is executed by changing the display mode of the identification information step by step. It is possible to execute a specific effect (e.g., icon change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation to be held, and the display mode includes a first stage mode (e.g., CD icon) and a second stage mode (e.g., blue (character icon) and a third stage mode (red character icon), and the power supply stopped during the display of the identification information in the second stage mode, which changes up to the third stage mode, is resumed to restart the game. When the control state is restored, the identification information displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after resuming the power supply without being conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped.

(Content 12 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of pending memories, which is determination information for which determination has not been performed, in a display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it takes a long time to grasp the number of reserved memories. There is a problem that there is a possibility that the

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110), initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before stopping the power supply, and determination by the determination means A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means (image display device) according to a result, and the control state of the game is determined. When restored, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means, and the first display area (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second Suspension display indicating the number of suspension storage in each of the suspension display 84) and the second display area (first suspension icon display area 70B, second suspension icon display area 70D) different from the first display area When the power supply stopped in the state with the reserved memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the reserved display is executed in the second display area during the execution of the specific display. However, the hold display can be executed in the first display area. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the interest of the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

(Content 13 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the stopped power supply is resumed during the effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and the control state of the game is restored, the interest in the game is lost. There was a problem that it could drop.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judging means (main control board 110), preliminary judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before the judgment means, and initializing the control state of the game after the power supply is started. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the state before the power supply is stopped, and according to the determination result of the determination means, the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) Effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by variable display, and light emitting means (winning entrance lamp NR) capable of changing to any of a plurality of notification modes, wherein the effect control is performed. The means is capable of executing a change effect (lamp change effect) suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and the change effect is being executed. When the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is set to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from the specific notification mode. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not being executed. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

(Content 14 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional gaming machine comprises main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with movable effect means that can be operated in a predetermined manner (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect corresponding to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command etc.), the initial operation can be performed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration specifying command, etc.), the initial operation can be performed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and it is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and from the main control means during execution of the variable effect When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to the signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to execute a special game effect (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the special game effect The initial operation can be executed when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , wherein the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means, and is capable of executing the effect operation and light emission of the movable effect means. In the case where the game control state is initialized and in the case where the game control state is restored, the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (the operation mode such as the number of steps and the motion of each step) is the same. However, the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the production), the initial operation of the movable production means can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) and based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the starting port), a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or restoring to the state before stopping the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of Effect light emission) can be executed, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device). In the variable effect, it is possible to oscillate display (temporary stop display) and then statically display (stop display) the effect symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, and the effect control means controls the effect symbol. When the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable effect that swings is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect at a predetermined timing (when receiving the special symbol confirmation command, when receiving the customer waiting command) During the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the design can be statically displayed on the display means without being oscillatingly displayed, and the performance corresponding to the signal can be executed When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) and determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball to the starting port) can be stored as a storage means (main control board 110) Then, based on the determination information, determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and control state of the game after power supply is started. An initial processing means (main control board 110) that initializes or restores the state before stopping the power supply, and the effect control means initializes the movable effect means (initial operation, initial light emission ) and the performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission) of the movable performance means, and the performance pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means The state of the gaming machine is a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed and a period of execution of the variable performance in the state where there is no pending memory. Including a first state and a second state which is an execution period of the variable performance in a state where the reserved memory exists, the performance control means displays the display means when the game control state is restored. It is possible to perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect pattern, and the specific display when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored. display mode (display of the initial screen only), and the display mode of the specific display when the power supply stopped during the first state or the second state is resumed and the first state or the second state is restored. A predetermined signal from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the display of the initial screen + the screen during recovery is different from the display of the screen during recovery, and the performance corresponding to the signal can be executed. When receiving a command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) and determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball to the starting port) can be stored as a storage means (main control board 110) Then, based on the determination information, determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and control state of the game after power supply is started. An initial processing means (main control board 110) that initializes or restores the state before stopping the power supply, and the effect control means initializes the movable effect means (initial operation, initial light emission ) and the performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission) of the movable performance means, and the performance pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means When a predetermined period elapses after the static display of the effect pattern on the display means, the display means executes the customer waiting effect (customer waiting demo effect). It is possible, when the production pattern is statically displayed after the fluctuation time of the variable production has elapsed, and when the production pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored, The main control is performed during a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the period until the customer waiting effect is executed can be varied and the effect in accordance with the signal can be executed. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) and determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball to the starting port) can be stored as a storage means (main control board 110) Then, based on the determination information, determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and control state of the game after power supply is started. An initial processing means (main control board 110) that initializes or restores the state before stopping the power supply, and the effect control means initializes the movable effect means (initial operation, initial light emission ) and the performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission) of the movable performance means, and the performance pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means It is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of , and based on the determination result of the prior determination means, a predetermined pre-reading announcement effect (continuous announcement effect) over a plurality of times of the variable effect can be executed. It is possible, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the prefetching notice effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the prefetching notice effect is not restarted, and next to the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped A control state (customer waiting state, variable When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during performance, jackpot performance), the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) and determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball to the starting port) can be stored as a storage means (main control board 110) Then, based on the determination information, determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and control state of the game after power supply is started. An initial processing means (main control board 110) that initializes or restores the state before stopping the power supply, and the effect control means initializes the movable effect means (initial operation, initial light emission ) and the performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission) of the movable performance means, and the performance pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means It is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of , and a specific performance (for example, an icon change performance) that indicates in stages the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over a plurality of times of the variable performance is executed. It is possible, and when the power supply stopped during execution of the specific effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, in the variable effect executed next to the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped A control state (customer waiting state, variable performance , jackpot presentation), when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling a light emitting means (winning entrance lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, and an operation in a predetermined mode Determination information acquired by (movement, light emission) movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) and establishment of acquisition conditions (entering game ball into start opening) Storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing (special figure determination information) as reserved storage, and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. determination means (main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or for restoring to the state before stopping the power supply, The effect control means is capable of executing an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and an effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means, and the light emission By changing the means to a specific notification mode, it is possible to execute a change performance (ramp change performance) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the change performance. is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means can be controlled to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from the specific notification mode, and an effect can be executed according to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance), the initial operation can be executed. be. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means, and in response to the signal When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which performance can be executed, the predetermined It is possible to output a notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◇ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and the game is progressing. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a waiting state (customer waiting state) where there is no customer waiting, and during execution of the customer waiting effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means. In this case, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) , the effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous to the player It is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and during execution of the variable effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration) from the main control means designated command, etc.), it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous to the player It is possible to execute a special game effect (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during execution of a special game (jackpot game), and a predetermined signal from the main control means during execution of the special game effect. When receiving a command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

(Content 15 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional gaming machine generally comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying effect images (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the effect control means is continued.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect corresponding to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means A game machine having a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling a display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying a production image (variation production, jackpot production, etc.) The effect control means is capable of displaying a game standby screen (a static display screen of effect symbols) on the display means in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and the game standby screen When the power supply to the main control means stops during display, the display of the game standby screen can be continued. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Content 16 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional gaming machine generally comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is one that executes abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification is not appropriately performed.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a detection means (starting door detection switch, Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means and, when the power supply to the game machine is started, if the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic Anomaly notification, radio wave anomaly notification, etc.) can be executed. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) in a game machine that can be played sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, and when the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when the power supply to the game machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification , radio wave anomaly notification, etc.), and if the control means and the detection means are connected during execution of the predetermined anomaly notification, for a predetermined period (30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.) Execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) in a game machine that can be played sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, When the control means and the detection means become disconnected (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) during power supply to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine that can be played, a detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, When the control means and the detection means become disconnected (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) during power supply to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality When the control means and the detection means are connected during execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the predetermined period of time (elapsed 30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.) Continue execution of anomaly notification. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is assumed to shift to a high-probability game state over a predetermined number of times after all jackpot games are completed. In this case, the game machine may be configured to shift to a high probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are completed, the high-probability game state is entered, and when the falling lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols in the high-probability game state is won, the high-probability game state is ended and the normal It may be a game machine that returns to the game state.

In addition, when the type of the special jackpot pattern is the normal pattern, it is shifted to the low probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, and when the type of the special jackpot pattern is the specific pattern, the next game is played after the end of the jackpot game. The game machine may be configured to shift to a high-probability game state that continues until the jackpot game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority. However, the gaming machine may be such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time (in parallel).

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 game machine 5 game board 44 normal figure gate 45 first starting port 47 second starting port 50 big prize winning port 70 first image display device 71 second image display device 110 main control board 110a main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Effect control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means capable of controlling effects according to signals from the main control means,
Equipped with production means capable of vibrating in a predetermined manner,
The main control means is
It is possible to transmit a predetermined signal based on the start of power supply,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined initial vibration of the effect means after the start of power supply,
It is possible to execute a variable performance with a plurality of performance symbols for notifying whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed by the display means,
It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect on the display means in the standby state,
While the power supply to the main control means is stopped during the display of the standby screen in which the plurality of effect symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination, if the power supply to the effect control means continues,
It is possible to continue the display of the standby screen in which the plurality of effect symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination,
When a predetermined signal is received during execution of the customer waiting effect after the predetermined initial vibration of the effect means after the start of power supply is completed,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the predetermined initial vibration of the effect means.

Images